summaryrefslogtreecommitdiff
path: root/Master/texmf-dist/doc/info
diff options
context:
space:
mode:
authorKarl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>2015-10-25 22:35:59 +0000
committerKarl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>2015-10-25 22:35:59 +0000
commitf68a915f164bf116f1bb31ab3e1d9f5b94824e29 (patch)
tree54152ae2daf301e13c0f592129a46d03ee92370f /Master/texmf-dist/doc/info
parentc4586dcabf84bccd9caaff8f5b8dcb7cffe324a2 (diff)
latex2e-help-texinfo (25oct15)
git-svn-id: svn://tug.org/texlive/trunk@38709 c570f23f-e606-0410-a88d-b1316a301751
Diffstat (limited to 'Master/texmf-dist/doc/info')
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/info/latex2e.info5985
1 files changed, 4023 insertions, 1962 deletions
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/info/latex2e.info b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/info/latex2e.info
index d8ed8d416c7..811d97f92a6 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/info/latex2e.info
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/info/latex2e.info
@@ -1,8 +1,8 @@
-This is latex2e.info, produced by texi2any version 5.9.91+dev from
+This is latex2e.info, produced by makeinfo version 6.0 from
latex2e.texi.
This document is an unofficial reference manual for LaTeX, a document
-preparation system, version of May 2015.
+preparation system, version of October 2015.
This manual was originally translated from 'LATEX.HLP' v1.0a in the
VMS Help Library. The pre-translation version was written by George D.
@@ -42,8 +42,8 @@ File: latex2e.info, Node: Top, Next: About this document, Up: (dir)
LaTeX2e: An unofficial reference manual
***************************************
-This document is an unofficial reference manual (version of May 2015)
-for LaTeX2e, a document preparation system.
+This document is an unofficial reference manual (version of October
+2015) for LaTeX2e, a document preparation system.
* Menu:
@@ -139,8 +139,8 @@ interspersed commands, for instance commands describing how the text
should be formatted. It is implemented as a set of related commands
that interface with Donald E. Knuth's TeX typesetting program (the
technical term is that LaTeX is a "macro package" for the TeX engine).
-The user produces the output document by giving that file to the TeX
-engine.
+The user produces the output document by giving that input file to the
+TeX engine.
The term LaTeX is also sometimes used to mean the language in which
the document is marked up, that is, to mean the set of commands
@@ -155,7 +155,7 @@ plain text, write it as 'LaTeX'.
* Starting and ending:: The standard beginning and end of a document.
* Output files:: Files produced.
-* TeX engines:: Programs that implementation LaTeX.
+* TeX engines:: Programs that can compile TeX and LaTeX.
* LaTeX command syntax:: General syntax of LaTeX commands.

@@ -164,8 +164,8 @@ File: latex2e.info, Node: Starting and ending, Next: Output files, Up: Overvi
2.1 Starting and ending
=======================
-LaTeX files have a simple global structure, with a standard starting and
-ending. Here is a "hello, world" example:
+LaTeX files have a simple global structure, with a standard beginning
+and ending. Here is a "hello, world" example:
\documentclass{article}
\begin{document}
@@ -182,8 +182,9 @@ the '\begin{document}' commands. This area is called the "preamble".
The '\begin{document} ... \end{document}' is a so-called
"environment"; the 'document' environment (and no others) is required in
-all LaTeX documents. LaTeX provides many environments itself, and many
-more are defined separately. *Note Environments::.
+all LaTeX documents (*note document::). LaTeX provides many
+environments itself, and many more are defined separately. *Note
+Environments::.
The following sections discuss how to produce PDF or other output
from a LaTeX input file.
@@ -249,7 +250,7 @@ of the main programs.
'latex'
'pdflatex'
- In TeX Live (<http://tug.org/texlive>, if LaTeX is invoked via
+ In TeX Live (<http://tug.org/texlive>), if LaTeX is invoked via
either the system command 'latex' or 'pdflatex', then the pdfTeX
engine is run (<http://ctan.org/pkg/pdftex>). When invoked as
'latex', the main output is a '.dvi' file; as 'pdflatex', the main
@@ -259,7 +260,7 @@ of the main programs.
program (<http://ctan.org/pkg/etex>), including additional
programming features and bi-directional typesetting, and has plenty
of extensions of its own. e-TeX is available on its own as the
- command 'etex', but this is plain TeX (and produces '.dvi').
+ system command 'etex', but this is plain TeX (and produces '.dvi').
In other TeX distributions, 'latex' may invoke e-TeX rather than
pdfTeX. In any case, the e-TeX extensions can be assumed to be
@@ -276,12 +277,17 @@ of the main programs.
'xelatex'
If LaTeX is invoked with the system command 'xelatex', the XeTeX
- engine is run (<http://tug.org/xetex>). Like LuaTeX, XeTeX also
+ engine is run (<http://tug.org/xetex>). Like LuaTeX, XeTeX
natively supports UTF-8 Unicode and TrueType and OpenType fonts,
though the implementation is completely different, mainly using
external libraries instead of internal code. XeTeX produces a
'.pdf' file as output; it does not support DVI output.
+ Internally, XeTeX creates an '.xdv' file, a variant of DVI, and
+ translates that to PDF using the ('x')'dvipdfmx' program, but this
+ process is automatic. The '.xdv' file is only useful for
+ debugging.
+
Other variants of LaTeX and TeX exist, e.g., to provide additional
support for Japanese and other languages ([u]pTeX,
<http://ctan.org/pkg/ptex>, <http://ctan.org/pkg/uptex>).
@@ -292,26 +298,78 @@ File: latex2e.info, Node: LaTeX command syntax, Prev: TeX engines, Up: Overvi
2.4 LaTeX command syntax
========================
-In the LaTeX input file, a command name starts with a '\'; the name
-itself then consists of either (a) a string of letters or (b) a single
-non-letter.
+In the LaTeX input file, a command name starts with a backslash
+character, '\'. The name itself then consists of either (a) a string of
+letters or (b) a single non-letter.
+
+ LaTeX commands names are case sensitive so that '\pagebreak' differs
+from '\Pagebreak' (the latter is not a standard command). Most commands
+are lowercase, but in any event you must enter all commands in the same
+case as they are defined.
- A command may be followed by zero, one, or more arguments, either
-required or optional. Required arguments are contained in curly braces,
-'{...}'. Optional arguments are contained in square brackets, '[...]'.
-Generally, but not universally, if the command accepts an optional
-argument, it comes first, before any required arguments.
+ A command may be followed by zero, one, or more arguments. These
+arguments may be either required or optional. Required arguments are
+contained in curly braces, '{...}'. Optional arguments are contained in
+square brackets, '[...]'. Generally, but not universally, if the
+command accepts an optional argument, it comes first, before any
+required arguments.
- Some commands have a '*' form that is related to the form without a
-'*', such as '\chapter' and '\chapter*'.
+ Inside of an optional argument, to use the character close square
+bracket (']') hide it inside curly braces, as in '\item[closing bracket
+{]}]'. Similarly, if an optional argument comes last, with no required
+argument after it, then to make the first character of the following
+text be an open square bracket, hide it inside curly braces.
- LaTeX commands are case sensitive; neither '\Begin{document}' nor
-'\begin{Document}' will work. Most commands are lowercase, but in any
-event you must enter all commands in the same case as they are defined.
+ LaTeX has the convention that some commands have a '*' form that is
+related to the form without a '*', such as '\chapter' and '\chapter*'.
+The exact difference in behavior varies from command to command.
This manual describes all accepted options and '*'-forms for the
commands it covers (barring unintentional omissions, a.k.a. bugs).
+* Menu:
+
+* Environment:: Area of the source with distinct behavior.
+* Declaration:: Change the value or meaning of a command.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: Environment, Next: Declaration, Up: LaTeX command syntax
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \begin{ENVIRONMENT NAME}
+ ..
+ \end{ENVIRONMENT NAME}
+
+ An area of LaTeX source, inside of which there is a distinct
+behavior. For instance, for poetry in LaTeX put the lines between
+'\begin{verse}' and '\end{verse}'.
+
+ \begin{verse}
+ There once was a man from Nantucket \\
+ ..
+ \end{verse}
+
+ The ENVIRONMENT NAME at the beginning must exactly match that at the
+end. This includes the case where ENVIRONMENT NAME ends in a
+star ('*'); both the '\begin' and '\end' texts must include the star.
+
+ Environments may have arguments, including optional arguments. This
+example produces a table. The first argument is optional (and causes
+the table to be aligned on its top row) while the second argument is
+required (it specifies the formatting of columns).
+
+ \begin{tabular}[t]{r|l}
+ .. rows of table ..
+ \end{tabular}
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: Declaration, Prev: Environment, Up: LaTeX command syntax
+
+A command that changes the value, or changes the meaning, of some other
+command or parameter. For instance, the '\mainmatter' command changes
+the setting of page numbers from roman numerals to arabic.
+

File: latex2e.info, Node: Document classes, Next: Fonts, Prev: Overview, Up: Top
@@ -335,6 +393,9 @@ document classes are available as separate packages; *note Overview::.)
matter, such as a preface, and back matter, such as an appendix
(*note Front/back matter::).
+'letter'
+ Mail, optionally including mailing labels (*note Letters::).
+
'report'
For documents of length between an 'article' and a 'book', such as
technical reports or theses, which may contain several chapters.
@@ -370,9 +431,29 @@ options for selecting the typeface size (default is '10pt'):
10pt 11pt 12pt
All of the standard classes accept these options for selecting the
-paper size (default is 'letterpaper'):
+paper size (these show height by width):
+
+'a4paper'
+ 210 by 297 mm (about 8.25 by 11.75 inches)
+
+'b5paper'
+ 176 by 250 mm (about 7 by 9.875 inches)
+
+'executivepaper'
+ 7.25 by 10.5 inches
- a4paper a5paper b5paper executivepaper legalpaper letterpaper
+'legalpaper'
+ 8.5 by 14 inches
+
+'letterpaper'
+ 8.5 by 11 inches (the default)
+
+ When using one of the engines pdfLaTeX, LuaLaTeX, or XeLaTeX (*note
+TeX engines::), options other than 'letterpaper' set the print area but
+you must also set the physical paper size. One way to do that is to put
+'\pdfpagewidth=\paperwidth' and '\pdfpageheight=\paperheight' in your
+document's preamble. The 'geometry' package provides flexible ways of
+setting the print area and physical page size.
Miscellaneous other options:
@@ -461,10 +542,10 @@ File: latex2e.info, Node: Font styles, Next: Font sizes, Up: Fonts
The following type style commands are supported by LaTeX.
This first group of commands is typically used with an argument, as
-in '\textit{italic text}'. In the table below, the corresponding
-command in parenthesis is the "declaration form", which takes no
-arguments. The scope of the declaration form lasts until the next type
-style command or the end of the current group.
+in '\textit{TEXT}'. In the table below, the corresponding command in
+parenthesis is the "declaration form", which takes no arguments, as in
+'{\itshape TEXT}'. The scope of the declaration form lasts until the
+next type style command or the end of the current group.
These commands, in both the argument form and the declaration form,
are cumulative; e.g., you can say either '\sffamily\bfseries' or
@@ -487,9 +568,6 @@ such as '\textit{\nocorr text}' or '\textsc{text \nocorr}'.
'\textit (\itshape)'
Italics.
-'\emph'
- Emphasis (switches between '\textit' and '\textrm').
-
'\textmd (\mdseries)'
Medium weight (default).
@@ -497,7 +575,7 @@ such as '\textit{\nocorr text}' or '\textsc{text \nocorr}'.
Boldface.
'\textup (\upshape)'
- Upright (default). The opposite of slanted.
+ Upright (default).
'\textsl (\slshape)'
Slanted.
@@ -514,45 +592,15 @@ such as '\textit{\nocorr text}' or '\textsc{text \nocorr}'.
'\textnormal (\normalfont)'
Main document font.
-'\mathrm'
- Roman, for use in math mode.
-
-'\mathbf'
- Boldface, for use in math mode.
-
-'\mathsf'
- Sans serif, for use in math mode.
-
-'\mathtt'
- Typewriter, for use in math mode.
-
-'\mathit'
-'(\mit)'
- Italics, for use in math mode.
-
-'\mathnormal'
- For use in math mode, e.g. inside another type style declaration.
-
-'\mathcal'
- 'Calligraphic' letters, for use in math mode.
-
- In addition, the command '\mathversion{bold}' can be used for
-switching to bold letters and symbols in formulas.
-'\mathversion{normal}' restores the default.
-
- Finally, the command '\oldstylenums{NUMERALS}' will typeset so-called
-"old-style" numerals, which have differing heights and depths (and
-sometimes widths) from the standard "lining" numerals. LaTeX's default
-fonts support this, and will respect '\textbf' (but not other styles;
-there are no italic old-style numerals in Computer Modern). Many other
-fonts have old-style numerals also; sometimes the 'textcomp' package
-must be loaded, and sometimes package options are provided to make them
-the default. FAQ entry:
-<http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=osf>.
+ Although it also changes fonts, the '\emph{TEXT}' command is
+semantic, for text to be emphasized, and should not be used as a
+substitute for '\textit'. For example, '\emph{START TEXT \emph{MIDDLE
+TEXT} END TEXT}' will result in the START TEXT and END TEXT in italics,
+but MIDDLE TEXT will be in roman.
LaTeX also provides the following commands, which unconditionally
switch to the given style, that is, are _not_ cumulative. Also, they
-are used differently than the above commands: '{\CMD ...}' instead of
+are used differently than the above commands: '{\CMD...}' instead of
'\CMD{...}'. These are two unrelated constructs.
'\bf'
@@ -561,9 +609,6 @@ are used differently than the above commands: '{\CMD ...}' instead of
'\cal'
Switch to calligraphic letters for math.
-'\em'
- Emphasis (italics within roman, roman within italics).
-
'\it'
Italics.
@@ -582,12 +627,56 @@ are used differently than the above commands: '{\CMD ...}' instead of
'\tt'
Typewriter (monospace, fixed-width).
- Some people consider the unconditional font-switching commands, such
-as '\tt', obsolete and _only_ the cumulative commands ('\texttt') should
-be used. I (Karl) do not agree. There are perfectly reasonable
-situations when an unconditional font switch is precisely what you need
-to get the desired output; for one example, *note 'description':
-description. Both sets of commands have their place.
+ The '\em' command is the unconditional version of '\emph'.
+
+ (Some people consider the unconditional font-switching commands, such
+as '\tt', obsolete and that only the cumulative commands ('\texttt')
+should be used. Others think that both sets of commands have their
+place and sometimes an unconditional font switch is precisely what you
+want; for one example, *note 'description': description.)
+
+ The following commands are for use in math mode. They are not
+cumulative, so '\mathbf{\mathit{SYMBOL}}' does not create a boldface and
+italic SYMBOL; instead, it will just be in italics. This is because
+typically math symbols need consistent typographic treatment, regardless
+of the surrounding environment.
+
+'\mathrm'
+ Roman, for use in math mode.
+
+'\mathbf'
+ Boldface, for use in math mode.
+
+'\mathsf'
+ Sans serif, for use in math mode.
+
+'\mathtt'
+ Typewriter, for use in math mode.
+
+'\mathit'
+'(\mit)'
+ Italics, for use in math mode.
+
+'\mathnormal'
+ For use in math mode, e.g., inside another type style declaration.
+
+'\mathcal'
+ Calligraphic letters, for use in math mode.
+
+ In addition, the command '\mathversion{bold}' can be used for
+switching to bold letters and symbols in formulas.
+'\mathversion{normal}' restores the default.
+
+ Finally, the command '\oldstylenums{NUMERALS}' will typeset so-called
+"old-style" numerals, which have differing heights and depths (and
+sometimes widths) from the standard "lining" numerals, which all have
+the same height as upper-case letters. LaTeX's default fonts support
+this, and will respect '\textbf' (but not other styles; there are no
+italic old-style numerals in Computer Modern). Many other fonts have
+old-style numerals also; sometimes the 'textcomp' package must be
+loaded, and sometimes package options are provided to make them the
+default. FAQ entry:
+<http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=osf>.

File: latex2e.info, Node: Font sizes, Next: Low-level font commands, Prev: Font styles, Up: Fonts
@@ -628,68 +717,136 @@ These commands are primarily intended for writers of macros and
packages. The commands listed here are only a subset of the available
ones.
-'\fontencoding{enc}'
- Select font encoding. Valid encodings include 'OT1' and 'T1'.
-
-'\fontfamily{family}'
- Select font family. Valid families include:
-
- * 'cmr' for Computer Modern Roman
- * 'cmss' for Computer Modern Sans Serif
- * 'cmtt' for Computer Modern Typewriter
-
- and numerous others.
-
-'\fontseries{series}'
- Select font series. Valid series include:
-
- * 'm' Medium (normal)
- * 'b' Bold
- * 'c' Condensed
- * 'bc' Bold condensed
- * 'bx' Bold extended
-
- and various other combinations.
-
-'\fontshape{shape}'
+'\fontencoding{ENCODING}'
+ Select the font encoding, the encoding of the output font. There
+ are a large number of valid encodings. The most common are 'OT1',
+ Knuth's original encoding for Computer Modern (the default), and
+ 'T1', also known as the Cork encoding, which has support for the
+ accented characters used by the most widespread European languages
+ (German, French, Italian, Polish and others), which allows TeX to
+ hyphenate words containing accented letters.
+
+'\fontfamily{FAMILY}'
+ Select the font family. The web page
+ <http://www.tug.dk/FontCatalogue/> provides one way to browse
+ through many of the fonts easily used with LaTeX. Here are
+ examples of some common families:
+
+ 'pag' Avant Garde
+ 'fvs' Bitstream Vera Sans
+ 'pbk' Bookman
+ 'bch' Charter
+ 'ccr' Computer Concrete
+ 'cmr' Computer Modern
+ 'pcr' Courier
+ 'phv' Helvetica
+ 'fi4' Inconsolata
+ 'lmr' Latin Modern
+ 'lmss' Latin Modern Sans
+ 'lmtt' Latin Modern Typewriter
+ 'pnc' New Century Schoolbook
+ 'ppl' Palatino
+ 'ptm' Times
+ 'uncl' Uncial
+ 'put' Utopia
+ 'pzc' Zapf Chancery
+
+'\fontseries{SERIES}'
+ Select the font series. A "series" combines a "weight" and a
+ "width". Typically, a font supports only a few of the possible
+ combinations. Some common combined series values include:
+
+ 'm' Medium (normal)
+ 'b' Bold
+ 'c' Condensed
+ 'bc' Bold condensed
+ 'bx' Bold extended
+
+ The possible values for weight, individually, are:
+
+ 'ul' Ultra light
+ 'el' Extra light
+ 'l' Light
+ 'sl' Semi light
+ 'm' Medium (normal)
+ 'sb' Semi bold
+ 'b' Bold
+ 'eb' Extra bold
+ 'ub' Ultra bold
+
+ The possible values for width, individually, are (the percentages
+ are just guides and are not followed precisely by all fonts):
+
+ 'uc' Ultra condensed, 50%
+ 'ec' Extra condensed, 62.5%
+ 'c' Condensed, 75%
+ 'sc' Semi condensed, 87.5%
+ 'm' Medium, 100%
+ 'sx' Semi expanded, 112.5%
+ 'x' Expanded, 125%
+ 'ex' Extra expanded, 150%
+ 'ux' Ultra expanded, 200%
+
+ When forming the SERIES string from the weight and width, drop the
+ 'm' that stands for medium weight or medium width, unless both
+ weight and width are 'm', in which case use just one (''m'').
+
+'\fontshape{SHAPE}'
Select font shape. Valid shapes are:
- * 'n' Upright (normal)
- * 'it' Italic
- * 'sl' Slanted (oblique)
- * 'sc' Small caps
- * 'ui' Upright italics
- * 'ol' Outline
-
- The two last shapes are not available for most font families.
-
-'\fontsize{size}{skip}'
- Set font size. The first parameter is the font size to switch to
- and the second is the line spacing to use; this is stored in a
- parameter named '\baselineskip'. The unit of both parameters
- defaults to pt. The default '\baselineskip' for the Computer
- Modern typeface is 1.2 times the '\fontsize'.
-
- The line spacing is also multiplied by the value of the
- '\baselinestretch' parameter when the type size changes; the
- default is 1. However, the best way to "double space" a document,
- if you should be unlucky enough to have to produce such, is to use
- the 'setspace' package; see
- <http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=linespace>.
+ 'n' Upright (normal)
+ 'it' Italic
+ 'sl' Slanted (oblique)
+ 'sc' Small caps
+ 'ui' Upright italics
+ 'ol' Outline
+
+ The two last shapes are not available for most font families, and
+ small caps are often missing as well.
+
+'\fontsize{SIZE}{SKIP}'
+ Set the font size and the line spacing. The unit of both
+ parameters defaults to points ('pt'). The line spacing is the
+ nominal vertical space between lines, baseline to baseline. It is
+ stored in the parameter '\baselineskip'. The default
+ '\baselineskip' for the Computer Modern typeface is 1.2 times the
+ '\fontsize'. Changing '\baselineskip' directly is inadvisable
+ since its value is reset every time a size change happens; see
+ '\baselinestretch', next.
+
+'\baselinestretch'
+ LaTeX multiplies the line spacing by the value of the
+ '\baselinestretch' parameter; the default factor is 1. A change
+ takes effect when '\selectfont' (see below) is called. You can
+ make line skip changes happen for the entire document by doing
+ '\renewcommand{\baselinestretch}{2.0}' in the preamble.
+
+ However, the best way to double-space a document is to use the
+ 'setspace' package. In addition to offering a number of spacing
+ options, this package keeps the line spacing single-spaced in
+ places where that is typically desirable, such as footnotes and
+ figure captions. See the package documentation.
'\linespread{FACTOR}'
Equivalent to '\renewcommand{\baselinestretch}{FACTOR}', and
therefore must be followed by '\selectfont' to have any effect.
Best specified in the preamble, or use the 'setspace' package, as
- described just above.
+ just described.
- The changes made by calling the font commands described above do
- not come into effect until '\selectfont' is called.
+'\selectfont'
+ The effects of the font commands described above do not happen
+ until '\selectfont' is called, as in
+ '\fontfamily{FAMILYNAME}\selectfont'. It is often useful to put
+ this in a macro:
+ '\newcommand*{\myfont}{\fontfamily{FAMILYNAME}\selectfont}'
+ (*note \newcommand & \renewcommand::).
-'\usefont{enc}{family}{series}{shape}'
+'\usefont{ENC}{FAMILY}{SERIES}{SHAPE}'
The same as invoking '\fontencoding', '\fontfamily', '\fontseries'
and '\fontshape' with the given parameters, followed by
- '\selectfont'.
+ '\selectfont'. For example:
+
+ \usefont{ot1}{cmr}{m}{n}

File: latex2e.info, Node: Layout, Next: Sectioning, Prev: Fonts, Up: Top
@@ -697,7 +854,7 @@ File: latex2e.info, Node: Layout, Next: Sectioning, Prev: Fonts, Up: Top
5 Layout
********
-Miscellaneous commands for controlling the general layout of the page.
+Commands for controlling the general page layout.
* Menu:
@@ -706,6 +863,7 @@ Miscellaneous commands for controlling the general layout of the page.
* \flushbottom:: Make all text pages the same height.
* \raggedbottom:: Allow text pages of differing height.
* Page layout parameters:: '\headheight' '\footskip'.
+* Floats:: Figures, tables, etc.

File: latex2e.info, Node: \onecolumn, Next: \twocolumn, Up: Layout
@@ -714,7 +872,11 @@ File: latex2e.info, Node: \onecolumn, Next: \twocolumn, Up: Layout
================
The '\onecolumn' declaration starts a new page and produces
-single-column output. This is the default.
+single-column output. If the document is given the class option
+'onecolumn' then this is the default behavior (*note Document class
+options::).
+
+ This command is fragile (*note \protect::).

File: latex2e.info, Node: \twocolumn, Next: \flushbottom, Prev: \onecolumn, Up: Layout
@@ -724,44 +886,109 @@ File: latex2e.info, Node: \twocolumn, Next: \flushbottom, Prev: \onecolumn,
Synopsis:
- \twocolumn[TEXT1COL]
+ \twocolumn[PRELIM ONE COLUMN TEXT]
The '\twocolumn' declaration starts a new page and produces
-two-column output. If the optional TEXT1COL argument is present, it is
+two-column output. If the document is given the class option
+'twocolumn' then this is the default (*note Document class options::).
+
+ If the optional PRELIM ONE COLUMN TEXT argument is present, it is
typeset in one-column mode before the two-column typesetting starts.
+ This command is fragile (*note \protect::).
+
These parameters control typesetting in two-column output:
'\columnsep'
- The distance between columns (35pt by default).
+ The distance between columns. The default is 35pt. Change it with
+ a command such as '\setlength{\columnsep}{40pt}' You must change it
+ before the two column environment starts; in the preamble is a good
+ place.
'\columnseprule'
- The width of the rule between columns; the default is 0pt, so there
- is no rule.
+ The width of the rule between columns. The rule appears halfway
+ between the two columns. The default is 0pt, meaning that there is
+ no rule. Change it with a command such as
+ '\setlength{\columnseprule}{0.4pt}', before the two-column
+ environment starts.
'\columnwidth'
- The width of the current column; this is equal to '\textwidth' in
- single-column text.
+ The width of a single column. In one-column mode this is equal to
+ '\textwidth'. In two-column mode by default LaTeX sets the width
+ of each of the two columns to be half of '\textwidth' minus
+ '\columnsep'.
- These parameters control float behavior in two-column output:
+ In a two-column document, the starred environments 'table*' and
+'figure*' are two columns wide, whereas the unstarred environments
+'table' and 'figure' take up only one column (*note figure:: and *note
+table::). LaTeX places starred floats at the top of a page. The
+following parameters control float behavior of two-column output.
'\dbltopfraction'
- Maximum fraction at the top of a two-column page that may be
- occupied by floats. Default '.7', can be usefully redefined to
- (say) '.9' to avoid going to float pages so soon.
+ The maximum fraction at the top of a two-column page that may be
+ occupied by two-column wide floats. The default is 0.7, meaning
+ that the height of a 'table*' or 'figure*' environment must not
+ exceed '0.7\textheight' . If the height of your starred float
+ environment exceeeds this then you can take one of the following
+ actions to prevent it from floating all the way to the back of the
+ document:
+
+ * Use the '[tp]' location specifier to tell LaTeX to try to put
+ the bulky float on a page by itself, as well as at the top of
+ a page.
+
+ * Use the '[t!]' location specifier to override the effect of
+ '\dbltopfraction' for this particular float.
+
+ * Increase the value of '\dbltopfraction' to a suitably large
+ number, to avoid going to float pages so soon.
+
+ You can redefine it, for instance with
+ '\renewcommand{\dbltopfraction}{0.9}'.
'\dblfloatpagefraction'
- The minimum fraction of a float page that must be occupied by
- floats, for a two-column float page. Default '.5'.
+ For a float page of two-column wide floats, this is the minimum
+ fraction that must be occupied by floats, limiting the amount of
+ blank space. LaTeX's default is '0.5'. Change it with
+ '\renewcommand'.
'\dblfloatsep'
- Distance between floats at the top or bottom of a two-column float
- page. Default '12pt plus2pt minus2pt' for '10pt' and '11pt'
- documents, '14pt plus2pt minus4pt' for '12pt'.
+ On a float page of two-column wide floats, this length is the
+ distance between floats, at both the top and bottom of the page.
+ The default is '12pt plus2pt minus2pt' for a document set at '10pt'
+ or '11pt', and '14pt plus2pt minus4pt' for a document set at
+ '12pt'.
'\dbltextfloatsep'
- Distance between a multi-column float at the top or bottom of a
- page and the main text. Default '20pt plus2pt minus4pt'.
+ This length is the distance between a multi-column float at the top
+ or bottom of a page and the main text. The default is '20pt
+ plus2pt minus4pt'.
+
+'\dbltopnumber'
+ On a float page of two-column wide floats, this counter gives the
+ maximum number of floats allowed at the top of the page. The LaTeX
+ default is '2'.
+
+ This example shows the use of the optional argument of '\twocolumn'
+to create a title that spans the two-column article:
+
+ \documentclass[twocolumn]{article}
+ \newcommand{\authormark}[1]{\textsuperscript{#1}}
+ \begin{document}
+ \twocolumn[{% inside this optional argument goes one-column text
+ \centering
+ \LARGE The Title \\[1.5em]
+ \large Author One\authormark{1},
+ Author Two\authormark{2},
+ Author Three\authormark{1} \\[1em]
+ \normalsize
+ \begin{tabular}{p{.2\textwidth}@{\hspace{2em}}p{.2\textwidth}}
+ \authormark{1}Department one &\authormark{2}Department two \\
+ School one &School two
+ \end{tabular}\\[3em] % space below title part
+ }]
+
+ Two column text here.

File: latex2e.info, Node: \flushbottom, Next: \raggedbottom, Prev: \twocolumn, Up: Layout
@@ -769,11 +996,21 @@ File: latex2e.info, Node: \flushbottom, Next: \raggedbottom, Prev: \twocolumn
5.3 '\flushbottom'
==================
-The '\flushbottom' declaration makes all text pages the same height,
-adding extra vertical space where necessary to fill out the page.
+The '\flushbottom' command can go at any point in the document body. It
+makes all later pages the same height, stretching the vertical space
+where necessary to fill out the page.
+
+ If TeX cannot satisfactorily stretch the vertical space in a page
+then you get a message like 'Underfull \vbox (badness 10000) has
+occurred while \output is active'. You can change to '\raggedbottom'
+(see below). Alternatively, you can try to adjust the 'textheight' to
+be compatible, or you can add some vertical stretch glue between lines
+or between paragraphs, as in '\setlength{\parskip}{0ex plus0.1ex}'. In
+a final editing stage you can adjust the height of individual pages
+(*note \enlargethispage::).
- This is the default if 'twocolumn' mode is selected (*note Document
-class options::).
+ This is the default only if you select the 'twoside' document class
+option (*note Document class options::).

File: latex2e.info, Node: \raggedbottom, Next: Page layout parameters, Prev: \flushbottom, Up: Layout
@@ -781,51 +1018,120 @@ File: latex2e.info, Node: \raggedbottom, Next: Page layout parameters, Prev:
5.4 '\raggedbottom'
===================
-The '\raggedbottom' declaration makes all pages the natural height of
-the material on that page. No rubber lengths will be stretched.
+The '\raggedbottom' command can go at any point in the document body.
+It makes all later pages the natural height of the material on that
+page; no rubber lengths will be stretched. Thus, in a two-sided
+document the facing pages may be different heights. See also
+'\flushbottom' above.
+
+ This is the default unless you select the 'twoside' document class
+option (*note Document class options::).

-File: latex2e.info, Node: Page layout parameters, Prev: \raggedbottom, Up: Layout
+File: latex2e.info, Node: Page layout parameters, Next: Floats, Prev: \raggedbottom, Up: Layout
5.5 Page layout parameters
==========================
+'\columnsep'
+'\columnseprule'
+'\columnwidth'
+ The distance between the two columns, the width of a rule between
+ the columns, and the width of the columns, when the document class
+ option 'twocolumn' is in effect (*note Document class options::).
+ *Note \twocolumn::.
+
'\headheight'
- Height of the box that contains the running head. Default is
- '30pt', except in the 'book' class, where it varies with the type
- size.
+ Height of the box that contains the running head. The default in
+ the 'article', 'report', and 'book' classes is '12pt', at all type
+ sizes.
'\headsep'
Vertical distance between the bottom of the header line and the top
- of the main text. Default is '25pt', except in the 'book' class,
- where it varies with the type size.
+ of the main text. The default in the 'article' and 'report'
+ classes is '25pt'. In the 'book' class the default is: if the
+ document is set at 10pt then it is '0.25in', and at 11pt and 12pt
+ it is '0.275in'.
'\footskip'
Distance from the baseline of the last line of text to the baseline
- of the page footer. Default is '30pt', except in the 'book' class,
- where it varies with the type size.
+ of the page footer. The default in the 'article' and 'report'
+ classes is '30pt'. In the 'book' class the default is: when the
+ type size is 10pt the default is '0.35in', while at 11pt it is
+ '0.38in', and at 12pt it is '30pt'.
'\linewidth'
Width of the current line, decreased for each nested 'list' (*note
- list::). Specifically, it is smaller than '\textwidth' by the sum
- of '\leftmargin' and '\rightmargin' (*note itemize::). The default
- varies with the font size, paper width, two-column mode, etc. For
- an 'article' document in '10pt', it's set to '345pt'; in two-column
- mode, that becomes '229.5pt'.
+ list::). That is, the nominal value for '\linewidth' is to equal
+ '\textwidth' but for each nested list the '\linewidth' is decreased
+ by the sum of that list's '\leftmargin' and '\rightmargin' (*note
+ itemize::).
+
+'\marginparpush'
+'\marginsep'
+'\marginparwidth'
+ The minimum vertical space between two marginal notes, the
+ horizontal space between the text body and the marginal notes, and
+ the horizontal width of the notes.
+
+ Normally marginal notes appear on the outside of the page, but the
+ declaration '\reversemarginpar' changes that (and
+ '\normalmarginpar' changes it back).
+
+ The defaults for '\marginparpush' in both 'book' and 'article'
+ classes are: '7pt' if the document is set at 12pt, and '5pt' if the
+ document is set at 11pt or 10pt.
+
+ For '\marginsep', in 'article' class the default is '10pt' except
+ if the document is set at 10pt and in two-column mode where the
+ default is '11pt'.
+
+ For '\marginsep' in 'book' class the default is '10pt' in
+ two-column mode and '7pt' in one-column mode.
+
+ For '\marginparwidth' in both 'book' and 'article' classes, in
+ two-column mode the default is 60% of '\paperwidth - \textwidth',
+ while in one-column mode it is 50% of that distance.
+
+'\oddsidemargin'
+'\evensidemargin'
+ The '\oddsidemargin' is the extra distance between the left side of
+ the page and the text's left margin, on odd-numbered pages when the
+ document class option 'twoside' is chosen and on all pages when
+ 'oneside' is in effect. When 'twoside' is in effect, on
+ even-numbered pages the extra distance on the left is
+ 'evensidemargin'.
+
+ LaTeX's default is that '\oddsidemargin' is 40% of the difference
+ between '\paperwidth' and '\textwidth', and '\evensidemargin' is
+ the remainder.
+
+'\paperheight'
+ The height of the paper, as distinct from the height of the print
+ area. It is normally set with a document class option, as in
+ '\documentclass[a4paper]{article}' (*note Document class
+ options::).
+
+'\paperwidth'
+ The width of the paper, as distinct from the width of the print
+ area. It is normally set with a document class option, as in
+ '\documentclass[a4paper]{article}' (*note Document class
+ options::).
'\textheight'
- The normal vertical height of the page body; the default varies
- with the font size, document class, etc. For an 'article' or
- 'report' document in '10pt', it's set to '43\baselineskip'; for
- 'book', it's '41\baselineskip'. For '11pt', it's '38\baselineskip'
- and for '12pt', '36\baselineskip'.
+ The normal vertical height of the page body. If the document is
+ set at a nominal type size of 10pt then for an 'article' or
+ 'report' the default is '43\baselineskip', while for a 'book' it is
+ '41\baselineskip'. At a type size of 11pt the default is
+ '38\baselineskip' for all document classes. At 12pt it is
+ '36\baselineskip' for all classes.
'\textwidth'
- The full horizontal width of the entire page body; the default
- varies as usual. For an 'article' or 'report' document, it's
- '345pt' at '10pt', '360pt' at '11pt', and '390pt' at '12pt'. For a
- 'book' document, it's '4.5in' at '10pt', and '5in' at '11pt' or
- '12pt'.
+ The full horizontal width of the entire page body. For an
+ 'article' or 'report' document, the default is '345pt' when the
+ chosen type size is 10pt, the default is '360pt' at 11pt, and it is
+ '390pt' at 12pt. For a 'book' document, the default is '4.5in' at
+ a type size of 10pt, and '5in' at 11pt or 12pt.
In multi-column output, '\textwidth' remains the width of the
entire page body, while '\columnwidth' is the width of one column
@@ -840,13 +1146,13 @@ File: latex2e.info, Node: Page layout parameters, Prev: \raggedbottom, Up: La
specified width, and revert to their normal values at the end of
the 'minipage' or '\parbox'.
- For completeness: '\hsize' is the TeX primitive parameter used when
- text is broken into lines. It should not be used in normal LaTeX
- documents.
+ This entry is included for completeness: '\hsize' is the TeX
+ primitive parameter used when text is broken into lines. It should
+ not be used in normal LaTeX documents.
'\topmargin'
Space between the top of the TeX page (one inch from the top of the
- paper, by default) and the top of the header. The default is
+ paper, by default) and the top of the header. The value is
computed based on many other parameters: '\paperheight - 2in -
\headheight - \headsep - \textheight - \footskip', and then divided
by two.
@@ -854,7 +1160,160 @@ File: latex2e.info, Node: Page layout parameters, Prev: \raggedbottom, Up: La
'\topskip'
Minimum distance between the top of the page body and the baseline
of the first line of text. For the standard classes, the default
- is the same as the font size, e.g., '10pt' at '10pt'.
+ is the same as the font size, e.g., '10pt' at a type size of 10pt.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: Floats, Prev: Page layout parameters, Up: Layout
+
+5.6 Floats
+==========
+
+Some typographic elements, such as figures and tables, cannot be broken
+across pages. They must be typeset outside of the normal flow of text,
+for instance floating to the top of a later page.
+
+ LaTeX can have a number of different classes of floating material.
+The default is the two classes, 'figure' (*note figure::) and 'table'
+(*note table::), but you can create a new class with the package
+'float'.
+
+ Within any one float class LaTeX always respects the order, so that
+the first figure in a document source must be typeset before the second
+figure. However, LaTeX may mix the classes, so it can happen that while
+the first table appears in the source before the first figure, it
+appears in the output after it.
+
+ The placement of floats is subject to parameters, given below, that
+limit the number of floats that can appear at the top of a page, and the
+bottom, etc. If so many floats are queued up that the limits prevent
+them all from fitting on a page then LaTeX places what it can and defers
+the rest to the next page. In this way, floats may be typset far from
+their place in the source. In particular, a float that is big can
+migrate to the end of the document. But then because all floats in a
+class must appear in sequential order, every subsequent float in that
+class also appears at the end.
+
+ In addition to changing the parameters, for each float you can tweak
+where the float placement algorithm tries to place it by using its
+PLACEMENT argument. The possible values are a sequence of the letters
+below. The default for both 'figure' and 'table', in both 'article' and
+'book' classes, is 'tbp'.
+
+'t'
+ (Top)--at the top of a text page.
+
+'b'
+ (Bottom)--at the bottom of a text page. (However, 'b' is not
+ allowed for full-width floats ('figure*') with double-column
+ output. To ameliorate this, use the 'stfloats' or 'dblfloatfix'
+ package, but see the discussion at caveats in the FAQ:
+ <http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=2colfloat>.
+
+'h'
+ (Here)--at the position in the text where the 'figure' environment
+ appears. However, 'h' is not allowed by itself; 't' is
+ automatically added.
+
+ To absolutely force a float to appear "here", you can
+ '\usepackage{float}' and use the 'H' specifier which it defines.
+ For further discussion, see the FAQ entry at
+ <http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=figurehere>.
+
+'p'
+ (Page of floats)--on a separate "float page", which is a page
+ containing no text, only floats.
+
+'!'
+ Used in addition to one of the above; for this float only, LaTeX
+ ignores the restrictions on both the number of floats that can
+ appear and the relative amounts of float and non-float text on the
+ page. The '!' specifier does _not_ mean "put the float here"; see
+ above.
+
+ Note: the order in which letters appear in the PLACEMENT argument
+does not change the order in which LaTeX tries to place the float; for
+instance, 'btp' has the same effect as 'tbp'. All that PLACEMENT does
+is that if a letter is not present then the algorithm does not try that
+location. Thus, LaTeX's default of 'tbp' is to try every location
+except placing the float where it occurs in the source.
+
+ To prevent LaTeX from moving floats to the end of the document or a
+chapter you can use a '\clearpage' command to start a new page and
+insert all pending floats. If a pagebreak is undesirable then you can
+use the 'afterpage' package and issue '\afterpage{\clearpage}'. This
+will wait until the current page is finished and then flush all
+outstanding floats.
+
+ LaTeX can typeset a float before where it appears in the source
+(although on the same output page) if there is a 't' specifier in the
+PLACEMENT paramater. If this is not desired, and deleting the 't' is
+not acceptable as it keeps the float from being placed at the top of the
+next page, then you can prevent it by either using the 'flafter' package
+or using the command '\suppressfloats[t]', which causes floats for the
+top position on this page to moved to the next page.
+
+ Parameters relating to fractions of pages occupied by float and
+non-float text (change them with '\renewcommand{PARAMETER}{DECIMAL
+BETWEEN 0 AND 1}'):
+
+'\bottomfraction'
+ The maximum fraction of the page allowed to be occupied by floats
+ at the bottom; default '.3'.
+
+'\floatpagefraction'
+ The minimum fraction of a float page that must be occupied by
+ floats; default '.5'.
+
+'\textfraction'
+ Minimum fraction of a page that must be text; if floats take up too
+ much space to preserve this much text, floats will be moved to a
+ different page. The default is '.2'.
+
+'\topfraction'
+ Maximum fraction at the top of a page that may be occupied before
+ floats; default '.7'.
+
+ Parameters relating to vertical space around floats (change them with
+'\setlength{PARAMETER}{LENGTH EXPRESSION}'):
+
+'\floatsep'
+ Space between floats at the top or bottom of a page; default '12pt
+ plus2pt minus2pt'.
+
+'\intextsep'
+ Space above and below a float in the middle of the main text;
+ default '12pt plus2pt minus2pt' for 10 point and 11 point
+ documents, and '14pt plus4pt minus4pt' for 12 point documents.
+
+'\textfloatsep'
+ Space between the last (first) float at the top (bottom) of a page;
+ default '20pt plus2pt minus4pt'.
+
+ Counters relating to the number of floats on a page (change them with
+'\setcounter{CTRNAME}{NATURAL NUMBER}'):
+
+'bottomnumber'
+ Maximum number of floats that can appear at the bottom of a text
+ page; default 1.
+
+'dbltopnumber'
+ Maximum number of full-sized floats that can appear at the top of a
+ two-column page; default 2.
+
+'topnumber'
+ Maximum number of floats that can appear at the top of a text page;
+ default 2.
+
+'totalnumber'
+ Maximum number of floats that can appear on a text page; default 3.
+
+ The principal TeX FAQ entry relating to floats
+<http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=floats> contains
+suggestions for relaxing LaTeX's default parameters to reduce the
+problem of floats being pushed to the end. A full explaination of the
+float placement algorithm is Frank Mittelbach's article "How to infuence
+the position of float environments like figure and table in LaTeX?"
+<http://latex-project.org/papers/tb111mitt-float.pdf>.

File: latex2e.info, Node: Sectioning, Next: Cross references, Prev: Layout, Up: Top
@@ -938,15 +1397,31 @@ Synopsis:
A '\label' command appearing in ordinary text assigns to KEY the
number of the current sectional unit; one appearing inside a numbered
-environment assigns that number to KEY.
+environment assigns that number to KEY. The assigned number can be
+retrieved with the '\ref{KEY}' command (*note \ref::).
+
+ Thus, in the example below the key 'sec:test' holds the number of the
+current section and the key 'fig:test' that of the figure.
+(Incidentally, labels must appear after captions in figures and tables.)
+
+ \section{section name}
+ \label{sec:test}
+ This is Section~\ref{sec:test}.
+ \begin{figure}
+ ...
+ \caption{caption text}
+ \label{fig:test}
+ \end{figure}
+ See Figure~\ref{fig:test}.
- A KEY name can consist of any sequence of letters, digits, or
+ A key name can consist of any sequence of letters, digits, or common
punctuation characters. Upper and lowercase letters are distinguished,
as usual.
- To avoid accidentally creating two labels with the same name, it is
-common to use labels consisting of a prefix and a suffix separated by a
-colon or period. Some conventionally-used prefixes:
+ Although the name can be more or less anything, a common convention
+is to use labels consisting of a prefix and a suffix separated by a
+colon or period. This helps to avoid accidentally creating two labels
+with the same name. Some commonly-used prefixes:
'ch'
for chapters
@@ -959,8 +1434,7 @@ colon or period. Some conventionally-used prefixes:
'eq'
for equations
- Thus, a label for a figure would look like 'fig:snark' or
-'fig.snark'.
+ Thus, a label for a figure would look like 'fig:test' or 'fig.test'.

File: latex2e.info, Node: \pageref, Next: \ref, Prev: \label, Up: Cross references
@@ -1005,35 +1479,34 @@ environment begins and ends in the same manner:
* Menu:
-* abstract:: Produce an abstract.
-* array:: Math arrays.
-* center:: Centered lines.
-* description:: Labelled lists.
-* displaymath:: Formulas that appear on their own line.
-* document:: Enclose the whole document.
-* enumerate:: Numbered lists.
-* eqnarray:: Sequences of aligned equations.
-* equation:: Displayed equation.
-* figure:: Floating figures.
-* filecontents:: Writing multiple files from the source.
-* flushleft:: Flushed left lines.
-* flushright:: Flushed right lines.
-* itemize:: Bulleted lists.
-* letter:: Letters.
-* list:: Generic list environment.
-* math:: In-line math.
-* minipage:: Miniature page.
-* picture:: Picture with text, arrows, lines and circles.
-* quotation:: Indented environment with paragraph indentation.
-* quote:: Indented environment with no paragraph indentation.
-* tabbing:: Align text arbitrarily.
-* table:: Floating tables.
-* tabular:: Align text in columns.
-* thebibliography:: Bibliography or reference list.
-* theorem:: Theorems, lemmas, etc.
-* titlepage:: For hand crafted title pages.
-* verbatim:: Simulating typed input.
-* verse:: For poetry and other things.
+* abstract:: Produce an abstract.
+* array:: Math arrays.
+* center:: Centered lines.
+* description:: Labelled lists.
+* displaymath:: Formulas that appear on their own line.
+* document:: Enclose the whole document.
+* enumerate:: Numbered lists.
+* eqnarray:: Sequences of aligned equations.
+* equation:: Displayed equation.
+* figure:: Floating figures.
+* filecontents:: Writing multiple files from the source.
+* flushleft:: Flushed left lines.
+* flushright:: Flushed right lines.
+* itemize:: Bulleted lists.
+* letter:: Letters.
+* list:: Generic list environment.
+* math:: In-line math.
+* minipage:: Miniature page.
+* picture:: Picture with text, arrows, lines and circles.
+* quotation and quote:: Include a quotation.
+* tabbing:: Align text arbitrarily.
+* table:: Floating tables.
+* tabular:: Align text in columns.
+* thebibliography:: Bibliography or reference list.
+* theorem:: Theorems, lemmas, etc.
+* titlepage:: For hand crafted title pages.
+* verbatim:: Simulating typed input.
+* verse:: For poetry and other things.

File: latex2e.info, Node: abstract, Next: array, Up: Environments
@@ -1042,6 +1515,7 @@ File: latex2e.info, Node: abstract, Next: array, Up: Environments
==============
Synopsis:
+
\begin{abstract}
...
\end{abstract}
@@ -1057,47 +1531,54 @@ File: latex2e.info, Node: array, Next: center, Prev: abstract, Up: Environme
Synopsis:
- \begin{array}{TEMPLATE}
- COL1 TEXT&COL1 TEXT&COLN}\\
+ \begin{array}{COLS}
+ COLUMN 1 ENTRY &COLUMN 2 ENTRY ... &COLUMN N ENTRY \\
...
\end{array}
- Math arrays are produced with the 'array' environment, normally
-within an 'equation' environment (*note equation::). It has a single
-mandatory TEMPLATE argument describing the number of columns and the
-alignment within them. Each column COL is specified by a single letter
-that tells how items in each row of that column should be formatted, as
-follows:
+ or
-'c'
- centered
-'l'
- flush left
-'r'
- flush right
-
- Column entries are separated by '&'. Column entries may include
-other LaTeX commands. Each row of the array is terminated with '\\'.
-
- In the template, the construct '@{TEXT}' puts TEXT between columns in
-each row.
+ \begin{array}[POS]{COLS}
+ COLUMN 1 ENTRY &COLUMN 2 ENTRY ... &COLUMN N ENTRY \\
+ ...
+ \end{array}
- Here's an example:
+ Produce a mathematical array. This environment can only be used in
+math mode, and normally appears within a displayed mathematics
+environment such as 'equation' (*note equation::). Column entries are
+separated by an ampersand ('&'). Rows are terminated with
+double-backslashes ('\\') (*note \\::).
+
+ The required argument COLS describes the number of columns, their
+alignment, and the formatting of the intercolumn regions. See *note
+tabular:: for the complete description of COLS, and of the other common
+features of the two environments, including the optional POS argument.
+
+ There are two ways that 'array' diverges from 'tabular'. The first
+is that 'array' entries are typeset in mathematics mode, in textstyle
+(except if the COLS definition specifies the column with '@p{..}', which
+causes the entry to be typeset in text mode). The second is that,
+instead of 'tabular''s parameter '\tabcolsep', LaTeX's intercolumn space
+in an array is governed by '\arraycolsep' which gives half the width
+between columns. The default for this is '5pt'.
+
+ To obtain arrays with braces the standard is to use the 'amsmath'
+package. It comes with environments 'pmatrix' for an array surrounded
+by parentheses '(..)', 'bmatrix' for an array surrounded by square
+brackets '[..]', 'Bmatrix' for an array surrounded by curly
+braces '{..}', 'vmatrix' for an array surrounded by vertical
+bars '|..|', and 'Vmatrix' for an array surrounded by double vertical
+bars '||..||', along with a number of other array constructs.
+
+ Here is an example of an array:
\begin{equation}
- \begin{array}{lrc}
- left1 & right1 & centered1 \\
- left2 & right2 & centered2 \\
+ \begin{array}{cr}
+ \sqrt{y} &12.3 \\
+ x^2 &3.4
\end{array}
\end{equation}
- The '\arraycolsep' parameter defines half the width of the space
-separating columns; the default is '5pt'. *Note tabular::, for other
-parameters which affect formatting in 'array' environments, namely
-'\arrayrulewidth' and '\arraystretch'.
-
- The 'array' environment can only be used in math mode.
-

File: latex2e.info, Node: center, Next: description, Prev: array, Up: Environments
@@ -1107,13 +1588,32 @@ File: latex2e.info, Node: center, Next: description, Prev: array, Up: Enviro
Synopsis:
\begin{center}
- LINE1 \\
- LINE2 \\
+ .. text ..
\end{center}
- The 'center' environment allows you to create a paragraph consisting
-of lines that are centered within the left and right margins on the
-current page. Each line is terminated with the string '\\'.
+ Environment to create a sequence of lines that are centered within
+the left and right margins on the current page. If the text in the
+environment body is too long to fit on a line, LaTeX will insert line
+breaks that avoid hyphenation and avoid stretching or shrinking any
+interword space. To force a line break at a particular spot use
+double-backslash '\\' (*note \\::).
+
+ This environment inserts space above and below the text body. See
+*note \centering:: to avoid such space, for example inside a 'figure'
+environment.
+
+ In this example, depending on the line width, LaTeX may choose a
+break for the part before the double backslash, will center the line or
+two, then will break at the double backslash, and will center the
+ending.
+
+ \begin{center}
+ My father considered that anyone who went to chapel and didn't drink
+ alcohol was not to be tolerated.\\
+ I grew up in that belief. --Richard Burton
+ \end{center}
+
+ A double backslash after the final line is optional.
* Menu:
@@ -1125,25 +1625,34 @@ File: latex2e.info, Node: \centering, Up: center
8.3.1 '\centering'
------------------
-The '\centering' declaration corresponds to the 'center' environment.
-This declaration can be used inside an environment such as 'quote' or in
-a 'parbox'. Thus, the text of a figure or table can be centered on the
-page by putting a '\centering' command at the beginning of the figure or
-table environment.
+Declaration that causes material in its scope to be centered. It is
+most often used inside an environment such as 'figure', or in a
+'parbox'.
Unlike the 'center' environment, the '\centering' command does not
-start a new paragraph; it simply changes how LaTeX formats paragraph
-units. To affect a paragraph unit's format, the scope of the
-declaration must contain the blank line or '\end' command (of an
-environment such as quote) that ends the paragraph unit.
-
- Here's an example:
+add vertical space above and below the text.
+
+ It also does not start a new paragraph; it simply changes how LaTeX
+formats paragraph units. If 'ww {\centering xx \\ yy} zz' is surrounded
+by blank lines then LaTeX will create a paragraph whose first line 'ww
+xx' is centered and whose second line, not centered, contains 'yy zz'.
+Usually what is desired is for the scope of the declaration to contain a
+blank line or the '\end' command of an environment such as 'figure' or
+'table' that ends the paragraph unit. Thus, if '{\centering xx \\
+yy\par} zz' is surrounded by blank lines then it makes a new paragraph
+with two centered lines 'xx' and 'yy', followed by a new paragraph with
+'zz' that is formatted as usual. See also the following example.
+
+ This example's '\centering' causes the graphic to be horizontally
+centered.
+
+ \begin{figure}
+ \centering
+ \includegraphics[width=0.6\textwidth]{ctan_lion.png}
+ \caption{CTAN Lion} \label{fig:CTANLion}
+ \end{figure}
- \begin{quote}
- \centering
- first line \\
- second line \\
- \end{quote}
+ The scope of the '\centering' ends with the '\end{figure}'.

File: latex2e.info, Node: description, Next: displaymath, Prev: center, Up: Environments
@@ -1154,22 +1663,39 @@ File: latex2e.info, Node: description, Next: displaymath, Prev: center, Up:
Synopsis:
\begin{description}
- \item [LABEL1] ITEM1
- \item [LABEL2] ITEM2
- ...
+ \item [FIRST LABEL] text of first item
+ \item [SECOND LABEL] text of second item
+ ...
\end{description}
- The 'description' environment is used to make labelled lists. Each
-LABEL is typeset in bold, flush right. The ITEM text may contain
-multiple paragraphs.
+ Environment to make a labelled list of items. Each item's LABEL is
+typeset in bold, flush-left. Each item's text may contain multiple
+paragraphs. Although the labels on the items are optional there is no
+sensible default, so all items should have labels.
- Another variation: since the bold style is applied to the labels, if
-you typeset a label in typewriter using '\texttt', you'll get bold
-typewriter: '\item[\texttt{bold and typewriter}]'. This may be too
-bold, among other issues. To get just typewriter, use '\tt', which
-resets all other style variations: '\item[{\tt plain typewriter}]'.
+ The list consists of at least one item; see *note \item:: (having no
+items causes the LaTeX error 'Something's wrong--perhaps a missing
+\item'). Each item is produced with an '\item' command.
- For details about list spacing, see *note itemize::.
+ Since the labels are in bold style, if the label text calls for a
+font change given in argument style (see *note Font styles::) then it
+will come out bold. For instance, if the label text calls for
+typewriter with '\item[\texttt{label text}]' then it will appear in bold
+typewriter, if that is available. The simplest way to get non-bolded
+typewriter is to use declaritive style '\item[{\tt label text}]'.
+Similarly, get normal text use '\item[{\rm label text}]'.
+
+ For other major LaTeX labelled list environments, see *note itemize::
+and *note enumerate::. For information about customizing list layout,
+see *note list::; also, the package 'enumitem' is useful for this.
+
+ This example shows the environment used for a sequence of
+definitions.
+
+ \begin{definition}
+ \item[lama] A priest.
+ \item[llama] A beast.
+ \end{definition}

File: latex2e.info, Node: displaymath, Next: document, Prev: description, Up: Environments
@@ -1180,19 +1706,42 @@ File: latex2e.info, Node: displaymath, Next: document, Prev: description, Up
Synopsis:
\begin{displaymath}
- MATH
+ .. math text ..
\end{displaymath}
-or
-
- \[MATH\]
-
- The 'displaymath' environment ('\[...\]' is a synonym) typesets the
-MATH text on its own line, centered by default. The global 'fleqn'
-option makes equations flush left; see *note Document class options::.
-
- No equation number is added to 'displaymath' text; to get an equation
-number, use the 'equation' environment (*note equation::).
+ Environment to typeset the math text on its own line, in display
+style and centered. To make the text be flush-left use the global
+option 'fleqn'; see *note Document class options::.
+
+ LaTeX will not break the math text across lines.
+
+ In the 'displaymath' environment no equation number is added to the
+math text. One way to get an equation number is to use the 'equation'
+environment (*note equation::).
+
+ Note that the 'amsmath' package has extensive displayed equation
+facilities. Those facilities are the best approach for such output in
+new documents. For example, there are a number of options in that
+package for having math text broken across lines.
+
+ The construct '\[..math text..\]' is essentially a synonym for
+'\begin{displaymath}..math text..\end{displaymath}' but the latter is
+easier to work with in the source file; for instance, searching for a
+square bracket may get false positives but the word 'displaymath' will
+likely be unique. (The construct '$$..math text..$$' from Plain TeX is
+sometimes mistakenly used as a synonym for 'displaymath'. It is not a
+synonym, because the 'displaymath' environment checks that it isn't
+started in math mode and that it ends in math mode begun by the matching
+environment start, because the 'displaymath' environment has different
+vertical spacing, and because the 'displaymath' environment honors the
+'fleqn' option.)
+
+ The output from this example is centered and alone on its line.
+ \begin{displaymath}
+ \int_1^2 x^2\,dx=7/3
+ \end{displaymath}
+ Also, the integral sign is larger than the inline version '\(
+\int_1^2 x^2\,dx=7/3 \)' produces.

File: latex2e.info, Node: document, Next: enumerate, Prev: displaymath, Up: Environments
@@ -1200,8 +1749,45 @@ File: latex2e.info, Node: document, Next: enumerate, Prev: displaymath, Up:
8.6 'document'
==============
-The 'document' environment encloses the body of a document. It is
-required in every LaTeX document. *Note Starting and ending::.
+The 'document' environment encloses the entire body of a document. It
+is required in every LaTeX document. *Note Starting and ending::.
+
+* Menu:
+
+* \AtBeginDocument:: Hook for commands at the start of the document.
+* \AtEndDocument:: Hook for commands at the end of the document.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \AtBeginDocument, Next: \AtEndDocument, Up: document
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \AtBeginDocument{CODE}
+
+ Save CODE and execute it when '\begin{document}' is executed, at the
+very end of the preamble. The code is executed after the font selection
+tables have been set up, so the normal font for the document is the
+current font. However, the code is executed as part of the preamble so
+you cannot do any typesetting with it.
+
+ You can issue this command more than once; the successive code lines
+will be executed in the order that you gave them.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \AtEndDocument, Prev: \AtBeginDocument, Up: document
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \AtEndDocument{CODE}
+
+ Save CODE and execute it near the end of the document. Specifically,
+it is executed when '\end{document}' is executed, before the final page
+is finished and before any leftover floating environments are processed.
+If you want some of the code to be executed after these two processes
+then include a '\clearpage' at the appropriate point in CODE.
+
+ You can issue this command more than once; the successive code lines
+will be executed in the order that you gave them.

File: latex2e.info, Node: enumerate, Next: eqnarray, Prev: document, Up: Environments
@@ -1212,37 +1798,61 @@ File: latex2e.info, Node: enumerate, Next: eqnarray, Prev: document, Up: Env
Synopsis:
\begin{enumerate}
- \item ITEM1
- \item ITEM2
+ \item [FIRST LABEL] text of first item
+ \item [SECOND LABEL] text of second item
...
\end{enumerate}
- The 'enumerate' environment produces a numbered list. Enumerations
-can be nested within one another, up to four levels deep. They can also
-be nested within other paragraph-making environments, such as 'itemize'
-(*note itemize::) and 'description' (*note description::).
+ Environment to produce a numbered list of items. The format of the
+label numbering depends on whether this environment is nested within
+another; see below.
- Each item of an enumerated list begins with an '\item' command.
-There must be at least one '\item' command within the environment.
+ The list consists of at least one item. Having no items causes the
+LaTeX error 'Something's wrong--perhaps a missing \item'. Each item is
+produced with an '\item' command.
- By default, the numbering at each level is done like this:
+ This example lists the top two finishers in the 1908 Olympic
+marathon.
+
+ \begin{enumerate}
+ \item Johnny Hayes (USA)
+ \item Charles Hefferon (RSA)
+ \end{enumerate}
- 1. 1., 2., ...
- 2. (a), (b), ...
- 3. i., ii., ...
- 4. A., B., ...
+ Enumerations may be nested within a paragraph-making environment,
+including 'itemize' (*note itemize::), 'description' (*note
+description::) and 'enumeration', up to four levels deep. The format of
+the label produced depends on the place in the nesting. This gives
+LaTeX's default for the format at each nesting level (where 1 is the
+outermost level):
+
+ 1. arabic number followed by a period: '1.', '2.', ...
+ 2. lower case letter inside parentheses: '(a)', '(b)' ...
+ 3. lower case roman numeral followed by a period: 'i.', 'ii.', ...
+ 4. upper case letter followed by a period: 'A.', 'B.', ...
The 'enumerate' environment uses the counters '\enumi' through
-'\enumiv' counters (*note Counters::). If the optional argument to
-'\item' is given, the counter is not incremented for that item.
+'\enumiv' counters (*note Counters::). If you use the optional argument
+to '\item' then the counter is not incremented for that item (*note
+\item::).
+
+ To change the format of the label use '\renewcommand' (*note
+\newcommand & \renewcommand::) on the commands '\labelenumi' through
+'\labelenumiv'. For instance, this first level list will be labelled
+with uppercase letters, in boldface, and without a trailing period:
+
+ \renewcommand{\labelenumi}{\textbf{\Alph{enumi}}}
+ \begin{enumerate}
+ \item eI
+ \item bi:
+ \item si:
+ \end{enumerate}
- The 'enumerate' environment uses the commands '\labelenumi' through
-'\labelenumiv' to produce the default label. So, you can use
-'\renewcommand' to change the labels (*note \newcommand &
-\renewcommand::). For instance, to have the first level use uppercase
-letters:
+ For a list of counter-labelling commands like '\Alph' see *note \alph
+\Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol::.
- \renewcommand{\labelenumi}{\Alph{enumi}}
+ For more on customizing the layout see *note list::. Also, the
+package 'enumitem' is useful for this.

File: latex2e.info, Node: eqnarray, Next: equation, Prev: enumerate, Up: Environments
@@ -1250,38 +1860,57 @@ File: latex2e.info, Node: eqnarray, Next: equation, Prev: enumerate, Up: Env
8.8 'eqnarray'
==============
-First, a caveat: the 'eqnarray' environment has some infelicities which
-cannot be overcome; the article "Avoid eqnarray!" by Lars Madsen
-describes them in detail
-(<http://tug.org/TUGboat/tb33-1/tb103madsen.pdf>). The bottom line is
-that it is better to use the 'align' environment (and others) from the
-'amsmath' package.
+First, a caveat: the 'eqnarray' environment is depreciated. It has
+infelicities that cannot be overcome, including spacing that is
+inconsistent with other mathematics elements (see the article "Avoid
+eqnarray!" by Lars Madsen
+<http://tug.org/TUGboat/tb33-1/tb103madsen.pdf>). New documents should
+include the 'amsmath' package and use the displayed mathematics
+environments provided there, such as the 'align' environment.
- Nevertheless, here is a description of 'eqnarray':
+ Nevertheless, for completeness and for a reference when working with
+old documents, a synopsis:
- \begin{eqnarray} (or 'eqnarray*')
- FORMULA1 \\
- FORMULA2 \\
- ...
+ \begin{eqnarray}
+ FIRST FORMULA LEFT &FIRST FORMULA MIDDLE &FIRST FORMULA RIGHT \\
+ ...
\end{eqnarray}
- The 'eqnarray' environment is used to display a sequence of equations
-or inequalities. It is similar to a three-column 'array' environment,
-with consecutive rows separated by '\\' and consecutive items within a
-row separated by an '&'.
+ or
- '\\*' can also be used to separate equations, with its normal meaning
-of not allowing a page break at that line.
+ \begin{eqnarray*}
+ FIRST FORMULA LEFT &FIRST FORMULA MIDDLE &FIRST FORMULA RIGHT \\
+ ...
+ \end{eqnarray*}
- An equation number is placed on every line unless that line has a
-'\nonumber' command. Alternatively, The '*'-form of the environment
-('\begin{eqnarray*} ... \end{eqnarray*}') will omit equation numbering
-entirely, while otherwise being the same as 'eqnarray'.
+ Display a sequence of equations or inequalities. The left and right
+sides are typeset in display mode, while the middle is typeset in text
+mode.
+
+ It is similar to a three-column 'array' environment, with items
+within a row separated by an ampersand ('&'), and with rows separated by
+double backslash '\\'). The starred form of line break ('\\*') can
+also be used to separate equations, and will disallow a page break there
+(*note \\::).
+
+ The unstarred form 'eqnarray' places an equation number on every line
+(using the 'equation' counter), unless that line contains a '\nonumber'
+command. The starred form 'eqnarray*' omits equation numbering, while
+otherwise being the same.
The command '\lefteqn' is used for splitting long formulas across
lines. It typesets its argument in display style flush left in a box of
zero width.
+ This example shows three lines. The first two lines make an
+inequality, while the third line has not entry on the left side.
+
+ \begin{eqnarray*}
+ \lefteqn{x_1+x_2+\cdots+x_n} \\
+ &\leq &y_1+y_2+\cdots+y_n \\
+ &= &z+y_3+\cdots+y_n
+ \end{eqnarray*}
+

File: latex2e.info, Node: equation, Next: figure, Prev: eqnarray, Up: Environments
@@ -1291,12 +1920,17 @@ File: latex2e.info, Node: equation, Next: figure, Prev: eqnarray, Up: Enviro
Synopsis:
\begin{equation}
- MATH
+ math text
\end{equation}
- The 'equation' environment starts a 'displaymath' environment (*note
-displaymath::), e.g., centering the MATH text on the page, and also
-places an equation number in the right margin.
+ Make a 'displaymath' environment (*note displaymath::) with an
+equation number in the right margin.
+
+ The equation number is generated using the 'equation' counter.
+
+ Note that the 'amsmath' package has extensive displayed equation
+facilities. Those facilities are the best approach for such output in
+new documents.

File: latex2e.info, Node: figure, Next: filecontents, Prev: equation, Up: Environments
@@ -1304,163 +1938,109 @@ File: latex2e.info, Node: figure, Next: filecontents, Prev: equation, Up: En
8.10 'figure'
=============
- \begin{figure[*]}[PLACEMENT]
- FIGBODY
+Synopsis:
+
+ \begin{figure}[PLACEMENT]
+ figure body
+ \caption[LOFTITLE]{TITLE}
\label{LABEL}
- \caption[LOFTITLE]{TEXT}
\end{figure}
- Figures are objects that are not part of the normal text, and are
-instead "floated" to a convenient place, such as the top of a page.
-Figures will not be split between two pages.
-
- When typesetting in double-columns, the starred form produces a
-full-width figure (across both columns).
-
- The optional argument '[placement]' determines where LaTeX will try
-to place your figure. There are four places where LaTeX can possibly
-put a float:
-
-'t'
- (Top)--at the top of a text page.
-
-'b'
- (Bottom)--at the bottom of a text page. However, 'b' is not
- allowed for full-width floats ('figure*') with double-column
- output. To ameliorate this, use the 'stfloats' or 'dblfloatfix'
- package, but see the discussion at caveats in the FAQ:
- <http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=2colfloat>.
-
-'h'
- (Here)--at the position in the text where the 'figure' environment
- appears. However, 't' is not allowed by itself; 't' is
- automatically added.
-
- To absolutely force a figure to appear "here", you can
- '\usepackage{float}' and use the 'H' specifier which it defines.
- For further discussion, see the FAQ entry at
- <http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=figurehere>.
-
-'p'
- (Page of floats)--on a separate float page, which is a page
- containing no text, only floats.
-
-'!'
- Used in addition to one of the above; for this float only, LaTeX
- ignores the restrictions on both the number of floats that can
- appear and the relative amounts of float and non-float text on the
- page. The '!' specifier does _not_ mean "put the float here"; see
- above.
-
- The standard 'report' and 'article' classes use the default placement
-'tbp'.
-
- The body of the figure is made up of whatever text, LaTeX commands,
-etc. you wish.
-
- The '\caption' command specifies caption TEXT for the figure. The
-caption is numbered by default. If LOFTITLE is present, it is used in
-the list of figures instead of TEXT (*note Tables of contents::).
-
- Parameters relating to fractions of pages occupied by float and
-non-float text:
-
- The maximum fraction of the page allowed to be occupied by floats
- at the bottom; default '.3'.
-
-'\floatpagefraction'
- The minimum fraction of a float page that must be occupied by
- floats; default '.5'.
-
-'\textfraction'
- Minimum fraction of a page that must be text; if floats take up too
- much space to preserve this much text, floats will be moved to a
- different page. The default is '.2'.
-
-'\topfraction'
- Maximum fraction at the top of a page that may be occupied before
- floats; default '.7'.
-
- Parameters relating to vertical space around floats:
+ or
-'\floatsep'
- Space between floats at the top or bottom of a page; default '12pt
- plus2pt minus2pt'.
-
-'\intextsep'
- Space above and below a float in the middle of the main text;
- default '12pt plus2pt minus2pt' for '10pt' and '11pt' styles, '14pt
- plus4pt minus4pt' for '12pt'.
-
-'\textfloatsep'
- Space between the last (first) float at the top (bottom) of a page;
- default '20pt plus2pt minus4pt'.
-
- Counters relating to the number of floats on a page:
-
-'bottomnumber'
- Maximum number of floats that can appear at the bottom of a text
- page; default 1.
-
-'dbltopnumber'
- Maximum number of full-sized floats that can appear at the top of a
- two-column page; default 2.
-
-'topnumber'
- Maximum number of floats that can appear at the top of a text page;
- default 2.
-
-'totalnumber'
- Maximum number of floats that can appear on a text page; default 3.
-
- The principal TeX FAQ entry relating to floats:
-<http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=floats>.
+ \begin{figure*}[PLACEMENT]
+ figure body
+ \caption[LOFTITLE]{TITLE}
+ \label{LABEL}
+ \end{figure*}
+
+ A class of floats (*note Floats::). Because they cannot be split
+across pages, they are not typeset in sequence with the normal text but
+instead are "floated" to a convenient place, such as the top of a
+following page.
+
+ For the possible values of PLACEMENT and their effect on the float
+placement algorithm, see *note Floats::.
+
+ The starred form 'figure*' is used when a document is in
+double-column mode (*note \twocolumn::). It produces a figure that
+spans both columns, at the top of the page. To add the possibility of
+placing at a page bottom see the discussion of PLACEMENT 'b' in *note
+Floats::.
+
+ The figure body is typeset in a 'parbox' of width '\textwidth' and so
+it can contain text, commands, etc.
+
+ The label is optional; it is used for cross-references (*note Cross
+references::). The optional '\caption' command specifies caption text
+for the figure. By default it is numbered. If LOFTITLE is present, it
+is used in the list of figures instead of TITLE (*note Tables of
+contents::).
+
+ This example makes a figure out of a graphic. It requires one of the
+packages 'graphics' or 'graphicx'. The graphic, with its caption, will
+be placed at the top of a page or, if it is pushed to the end of the
+document, on a page of floats.
+
+ \begin{figure}[t]
+ \centering
+ \includegraphics[width=0.5\textwidth]{CTANlion.png}
+ \caption{The CTAN lion, by Duane Bibby}
+ \end{figure}

File: latex2e.info, Node: filecontents, Next: flushleft, Prev: figure, Up: Environments
-8.11 'filecontents': Create external files
-==========================================
+8.11 'filecontents': Write an external file
+===========================================
Synopsis:
\begin{filecontents}{FILENAME}
- CONTENTS-OF-FILE
+ TEXT
\end{filecontents}
- ...
- \documentclass{MY-DOCUMENT-CLASS}
- The 'filecontents' environment is an "initial command", meaning that
-it can be used only before the '\documentclass' command, as in the
-synopsis above.
+ or
- LaTeX will create a file named FILENAME with the content
-CONTENTS-OF-FILE preceded by a header comment indicating how and when
-the file was generated. If the file already exists then nothing will
-happen.
+ \begin{filecontents*}{FILENAME}
+ TEXT
+ \end{filecontents*}
- You can also use the 'filecontents' package, which has the following
-advantages:
+ Create a file named FILENAME and fill it with TEXT. The unstarred
+version of the environment 'filecontents' prefixes the content of the
+created file with a header; see the example below. The starred version
+'filecontents*' does not include the header.
- * If the file already exists, then it will be overwritten.
+ This environment can be used anywhere in the preamble, although it
+often appears before the '\documentclass' command. It is typically used
+when a source file requires a nonstandard style or class file. The
+environment will write that file to the directory containing the source
+and thus make the source file self-contained. Another use is to include
+'bib' references in the file, again to make it self-contained.
- * You can use the 'filecontents' environment at any point after the
- declaration '\usepackage{filecontents}', not just before
- '\documentclass'.
+ The environment checks whether a file of that name already exists and
+if so, does not do anything. There is a 'filecontents' package that
+redefines the 'filecontents' environment so that instead of doing
+nothing in that case, it will overwrite the existing file.
- * The 'filecontents' package also provides a 'filecontents*'
- environment which is used in the same way as the 'filecontents'
- environment except that it won't insert any leading comment, so it
- is better suited to create files which aren't in LaTeX format.
+ For example, this document
- The 'filecontents' environment only creates the file, and is
-unrelated to using the created file. So you need to use, for instance,
-'\input' or '\usepackage' or '\bibliography' or whatever is applicable,
-to use the created file.
+ \documentclass{article}
+ \begin{filecontents}{JH.sty}
+ \newcommand{\myname}{Jim Hef{}feron}
+ \end{filecontents}
+ \usepackage{JH}
+ \begin{document}
+ Article by \myname.
+ \end{document}
- This environment is also useful to make a document in a
-self-contained file, for example, for a bug report, or to keep the
-content of a '.bib' file in the same file as the main document.
+ produces this file 'JH.sty'.
+
+ %% LaTeX2e file `JH.sty'
+ %% generated by the `filecontents' environment
+ %% from source `test' on 2015/10/12.
+ %%
+ \newcommand{\myname}{Jim Hef{}feron}

File: latex2e.info, Node: flushleft, Next: flushright, Prev: filecontents, Up: Environments
@@ -1476,7 +2056,7 @@ File: latex2e.info, Node: flushleft, Next: flushright, Prev: filecontents, U
The 'flushleft' environment allows you to create a paragraph
consisting of lines that are flush to the left-hand margin and ragged
-right Each line must be terminated with the string '\\'.
+right. Each line must be terminated with the string '\\'.
* Menu:
@@ -1512,7 +2092,7 @@ File: latex2e.info, Node: flushright, Next: itemize, Prev: flushleft, Up: En
The 'flushright' environment allows you to create a paragraph
consisting of lines that are flush to the right-hand margin and ragged
-left. Each line must be terminated with the string '\\'.
+left. Each line must be terminated with the control sequence '\\'.
* Menu:
@@ -1675,6 +2255,44 @@ empty, i.e., '{}', which leaves the default spacing.
The width used for typesetting the list items is specified by
'\linewidth' (*note Page layout parameters::).
+* Menu:
+
+* \item:: An entry in a list.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \item, Up: list
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \item text of item
+
+ or
+ \item[OPTIONAL LABEL] text of item
+
+ An entry in a list. The entries are prefixed by a label, whose
+default depends on the list type.
+
+ Because the optional argument OPTIONAL LABEL is surrounded by square
+brackets ('[' and ']'), to use square brackets inside the optional
+argument you must hide them inside curly braces, as in '\item[Close
+square bracket, {]}]'. Similarly, to use an open square bracket as
+first character in the text of the item, also hide it inside curly
+braces. *Note LaTeX command syntax::.
+
+ In this example the 'enumerate' list has two items that use the
+default label and one that uses the optional label.
+
+ \begin{enumerate}
+ \item Moe
+ \item[sometimes] Shemp
+ \item Larry
+ \end{enumerate}
+
+ The first item is labelled '1.', the second item is labelled
+'sometimes', and the third item is labelled '2.' (note that, because of
+the optional label in the second item, the third item does not get a
+'3.').
+

File: latex2e.info, Node: math, Next: minipage, Prev: list, Up: Environments
@@ -1688,7 +2306,7 @@ Synopsis:
\end{math}
The 'math' environment inserts the given MATH within the running
-text. '\(...\))' and '$...$' are synonyms. *Note Math formulas::.
+text. '\(...\)' and '$...$' are synonyms. *Note Math formulas::.

File: latex2e.info, Node: minipage, Next: picture, Prev: math, Up: Environments
@@ -1722,12 +2340,12 @@ Counters::).
footnotes; they may wind up at the bottom of the wrong minipage.

-File: latex2e.info, Node: picture, Next: quotation, Prev: minipage, Up: Environments
+File: latex2e.info, Node: picture, Next: quotation and quote, Prev: minipage, Up: Environments
8.19 'picture'
==============
- \begin{picture}(width,height)(x offset,y offset)
+ \begin{picture}(WIDTH,HEIGHT)(XOFFSET,YOFFSET)
... PICTURE COMMANDS ...
\end{picture}
@@ -1744,24 +2362,24 @@ a length of 2.54 centimeters.
'\setlength' command, outside of a 'picture' environment. The default
value is '1pt'.
- A position is a pair of coordinates, such as '(2.4,-5)', specifying
+ A "position" is a pair of coordinates, such as '(2.4,-5)', specifying
the point with x-coordinate '2.4' and y-coordinate '-5'. Coordinates
are specified in the usual way with respect to an origin, which is
normally at the lower-left corner of the picture. Note that when a
position appears as an argument, it is not enclosed in braces; the
parentheses serve to delimit the argument.
- The 'picture' environment has one mandatory argument, which is a
-'position'. It specifies the size of the picture. The environment
-produces a rectangular box with width and height determined by this
-argument's x- and y-coordinates.
+ The 'picture' environment has one mandatory argument which is a
+position (WIDTH,HEIGHT), which specifies the size of the picture. The
+environment produces a rectangular box with these WIDTH and HEIGHT.
- The 'picture' environment also has an optional 'position' argument,
-following the 'size' argument, that can change the origin. (Unlike
-ordinary optional arguments, this argument is not contained in square
-brackets.) The optional argument gives the coordinates of the point at
-the lower-left corner of the picture (thereby determining the origin).
-For example, if '\unitlength' has been set to '1mm', the command
+ The 'picture' environment also has an optional position argument
+(XOFFSET,YOFFSET), following the size argument, that can change the
+origin. (Unlike ordinary optional arguments, this argument is not
+contained in square brackets.) The optional argument gives the
+coordinates of the point at the lower-left corner of the picture
+(thereby determining the origin). For example, if '\unitlength' has
+been set to '1mm', the command
\begin{picture}(100,200)(10,20)
@@ -1818,6 +2436,7 @@ File: latex2e.info, Node: \circle, Next: \makebox (picture), Up: picture
----------------
Synopsis:
+
\circle[*]{DIAMETER}
The '\circle' command produces a circle with a diameter as close to
@@ -1833,6 +2452,7 @@ File: latex2e.info, Node: \makebox (picture), Next: \framebox (picture), Prev
-----------------
Synopsis:
+
\makebox(WIDTH,HEIGHT)[POSITION]{TEXT}
The '\makebox' command for the picture environment is similar to the
@@ -1962,6 +2582,7 @@ File: latex2e.info, Node: \multiput, Next: \oval, Prev: \thinlines, Up: pict
-------------------
Synopsis:
+
\multiput(X,Y)(DELTA_X,DELTA_Y){N}{OBJ}
The '\multiput' command copies the object OBJ in a regular pattern
@@ -1979,17 +2600,20 @@ Synopsis:
\oval(WIDTH,HEIGHT)[PORTION]
The '\oval' command produces a rectangle with rounded corners. The
-optional argument PORTION allows you to select part of the oval via the
-following:
+optional argument PORTION allows you to produce only half of the oval
+via the following:
't'
- selects the top portion;
+ selects the top half;
'b'
- selects the bottom portion;
+ selects the bottom half;
'r'
- selects the right portion;
+ selects the right half;
'l'
- selects the left portion.
+ selects the left half.
+
+ It is also possible to produce only one quarter of the oval by
+setting PORTION to 'tr', 'br', 'bl', or 'tl'.
The "corners" of the oval are made with quarter circles with a
maximum radius of 20pt, so large "ovals" will look more like boxes with
@@ -2045,10 +2669,10 @@ length and slope. The XSLOPE and YSLOPE values must lie between -4 and
+4, inclusive.

-File: latex2e.info, Node: quotation, Next: quote, Prev: picture, Up: Environments
+File: latex2e.info, Node: quotation and quote, Next: tabbing, Prev: picture, Up: Environments
-8.20 'quotation'
-================
+8.20 'quotation' and 'quote'
+============================
Synopsis:
@@ -2056,34 +2680,37 @@ Synopsis:
TEXT
\end{quotation}
- The margins of the 'quotation' environment are indented on both the
-left and the right. The text is justified at both margins. Leaving a
-blank line between text produces a new paragraph.
-
- Unlike the 'quote' environment, each paragraph is indented normally.
-
-
-File: latex2e.info, Node: quote, Next: tabbing, Prev: quotation, Up: Environments
-
-8.21 'quote'
-============
-
-Synopsis:
+ or
\begin{quote}
TEXT
\end{quote}
- The margins of the 'quote' environment are indented on both the left
-and the right. The text is justified at both margins. Leaving a blank
-line between text produces a new paragraph.
+ Include a quotation.
- Unlike the 'quotation' environment, paragraphs are not indented.
+ In both environments, margins are indented on both sides by
+'\leftmargin' and the text is justified at both. As with the main text,
+leaving a blank line produces a new paragraph.
+
+ To compare the two: in the 'quotation' environment, paragraphs are
+indented by 1.5em and the space between paragraphs is small, '0pt plus
+1pt'. In the 'quote' environment, paragraphs are not indented and there
+is vertical space between paragraphs (it is the rubber length
+'\parsep'). Thus, the 'quotation' environment may be more suitable for
+documents where new paragraphs are marked by an indent rather than by a
+vertical separation. In addition, 'quote' may be more suitable for a
+short quotation or a sequence of short quotations.
+
+ \begin{quotation}
+ \it Four score and seven years ago
+ .. shall not perish from the earth.
+ \hspace{1em plus 1fill}---Abraham Lincoln
+ \end{quotation}

-File: latex2e.info, Node: tabbing, Next: table, Prev: quote, Up: Environments
+File: latex2e.info, Node: tabbing, Next: table, Prev: quotation and quote, Up: Environments
-8.22 'tabbing'
+8.21 'tabbing'
==============
Synopsis:
@@ -2127,7 +2754,7 @@ environment.
'\' (tabbing)'
Moves everything that you have typed so far in the current column,
- i.e. everything from the most recent '\>', '\<', '\'', '\\', or
+ i.e., everything from the most recent '\>', '\<', '\'', '\\', or
'\kill' command, to the right of the previous column, flush against
the current column's tab stop.
@@ -2177,81 +2804,111 @@ environment.

File: latex2e.info, Node: table, Next: tabular, Prev: tabbing, Up: Environments
-8.23 'table'
+8.22 'table'
============
Synopsis:
- \begin{table}[placement]
+ \begin{table}[PLACEMENT]
+ table body
+ \caption[LOFTITLE]{TITLE}
+ \label{LABEL}
+ \end{table}
- body of the table
+ A class of floats (*note Floats::). Because they cannot be split
+across pages, they are not typeset in sequence with the normal text but
+instead are "floated" to a convenient place, such as the top of a
+following page.
- \caption{table title}
- \end{table}
+ For the possible values of PLACEMENT and their effect on the float
+placement algorithm, see *note Floats::.
- Tables are objects that are not part of the normal text, and are
-usually "floated" to a convenient place, like the top of a page. Tables
-will not be split between two pages.
+ The table body is typeset in a 'parbox' of width '\textwidth' and so
+it can contain text, commands, etc.
- The optional argument '[placement]' determines where LaTeX will try
-to place your table. There are four places where LaTeX can possibly put
-a float; these are the same as that used with the 'figure' environment,
-and described there (*note figure::).
+ The label is optional; it is used for cross-references (*note Cross
+references::). The optional '\caption' command specifies caption text
+for the table. By default it is numbered. If LOTTITLE is present, it
+is used in the list of tables instead of TITLE (*note Tables of
+contents::).
- The standard 'report' and 'article' classes use the default placement
-'[tbp]'.
+ In this example the table and caption will float to the bottom of a
+page, unless it is pushed to a float page at the end.
- The body of the table is made up of whatever text, LaTeX commands,
-etc., you wish. The '\caption' command allows you to title your table.
+ \begin{table}[b]
+ \centering
+ \begin{tabular}{r|p{2in}} \hline
+ One &The loneliest number \\
+ Two &Can be as sad as one.
+ It's the loneliest number since the number one.
+ \end{tabular}
+ \caption{Cardinal virtues}
+ \label{tab:CardinalVirtues}
+ \end{table}

File: latex2e.info, Node: tabular, Next: thebibliography, Prev: table, Up: Environments
-8.24 'tabular'
+8.23 'tabular'
==============
Synopsis:
- \begin{tabular}[pos]{cols}
- column 1 entry & column 2 entry ... & column n entry \\
- ...
+ \begin{tabular}[POS]{COLS}
+ column 1 entry &column 2 entry ... &column n entry \\
+ ...
\end{tabular}
or
- \begin{tabular*}{width}[pos]{cols}
- column 1 entry & column 2 entry ... & column n entry \\
- ...
+ \begin{tabular*}{WIDTH}[POS]{COLS}
+ column 1 entry &column 2 entry ... &column n entry \\
+ ...
\end{tabular*}
- These environments produce a box consisting of a sequence of rows of
-items, aligned vertically in columns.
-
- '\\' must be used to specify the end of each row of the table, except
-for the last, where it is optional--unless an '\hline' command (to put a
-rule below the table) follows.
-
- The mandatory and optional arguments consist of:
+ These environments produce a table, a box consisting of a sequence of
+horizontal rows. Each row consists of items that are aligned vertically
+in columns. This illustrates many of the features.
-'width'
- Specifies the width of the 'tabular*' environment. There must be
- rubber space between columns that can stretch to fill out the
- specified width.
-
-'pos'
- Specifies the vertical position; default is alignment on the centre
- of the environment.
+ \begin{tabular}{l|l}
+ \textit{Player name} &\textit{Career home runs} \\
+ \hline
+ Hank Aaron &755 \\
+ Babe Ruth &714
+ \end{tabular}
- 't'
- align on top row
+ The vertical format of two left-aligned columns, with a vertical bar
+between them, is specified in 'tabular''s argument '{l|l}'. Columns are
+separated with an ampersand '&'. A horizontal rule between two rows is
+created with '\hline'. The end of each row is marked with a double
+backslash '\\'. This '\\' is optional after the last row unless an
+'\hline' command follows, to put a rule below the table.
- 'b'
- align on bottom row
+ The required and optional arguments to 'tabular' consist of:
-'cols'
- Specifies the column formatting. It consists of a sequence of the
- following specifiers, corresponding to the sequence of columns and
- intercolumn material.
+WIDTH
+ Required for 'tabular*', not allowed for 'tabular'. Specifies the
+ width of the 'tabular*' environment. The space between columns
+ should be rubber, as with '@{\extracolsep{\fill}}', to allow the
+ table to stretch or shrink to make the specified width, or else you
+ are likely to get the 'Underfull \hbox (badness 10000) in alignment
+ ..' warning.
+
+POS
+ Optional. Specifies the table's vertical position. The default is
+ to align the table so its vertical center matches the baseline of
+ the surrounding text. There are two other possible alignments: 't'
+ aligns the table so its top row matches the baseline of the
+ surrounding text, and 'b' aligns on the bottom row.
+
+ This only has an effect if there is other text. In the common case
+ of a 'tabular' alone in a 'center' environment this option makes no
+ difference.
+
+COLS
+ Required. Specifies the formatting of columns. It consists of a
+ sequence of the following specifiers, corresponding to the types of
+ column and intercolumn material.
'l'
A column of left-aligned items.
@@ -2265,132 +2922,276 @@ rule below the table) follows.
'|'
A vertical line the full height and depth of the environment.
- '@{TEXT}'
- This inserts TEXT in every row. An @-expression suppresses
- the intercolumn space normally inserted between columns; any
- desired space before the adjacent item must be included in
- TEXT.
-
- To insert commands that are automatically executed before a
- given column, you have to load the 'array' package and use the
- '>{...}' specifier.
-
- An '\extracolsep{wd}' command in an @-expression causes an
- extra space of width 'wd' to appear to the left of all
+ '@{TEXT OR SPACE}'
+ This inserts TEXT OR SPACE at this location in every row. The
+ TEXT OR SPACE material is typeset in LR mode. This text is
+ fragile (*note \protect::).
+
+ This specifier is optional: unless you put in your own
+ @-expression then LaTeX's book, article, and report classes
+ will put on either side of each column a space of length
+ '\tabcolsep', which by default is '6pt'. That is, by default
+ adjacent columns are separated by 12pt (so '\tabcolsep' is
+ misleadingly-named since it is not the separation between
+ tabular columns). Also by default a space of 6pt comes before
+ the first column as well as after the final column, unless you
+ put a '@{..}' or '|' there.
+
+ If you override the default and use an @-expression then you
+ must insert any desired space yourself, as in
+ '@{\hspace{1em}}'.
+
+ An empty expression '@{}' will eliminate the space, including
+ the space at the start or end, as in the example below where
+ the tabular lines need to lie on the left margin.
+
+ \begin{flushleft}
+ \begin{tabular}{@{}l}
+ ..
+ \end{tabular}
+ \end{flushleft}
+
+ This example shows text, a decimal point, between the columns,
+ arranged so the numbers in the table are aligned on that
+ decimal point.
+
+ \begin{tabular}{r@{$.$}l}
+ $3$ &$14$ \\
+ $9$ &$80665$
+ \end{tabular}
+
+ An '\extracolsep{WD}' command in an @-expression causes an
+ extra space of width WD to appear to the left of all
subsequent columns, until countermanded by another
'\extracolsep' command. Unlike ordinary intercolumn space,
this extra space is not suppressed by an @-expression. An
'\extracolsep' command can be used only in an @-expression in
- the 'cols' argument.
+ the 'cols' argument. Below, LaTeX inserts the right amount of
+ intercolumn space to make the entire table 4 inches wide.
+
+ \begin{center}
+ \begin{tabular*}{4in}{l@{\ \ldots\extracolsep{\fill}}l}
+ Seven times down, eight times up
+ &such is life!
+ \end{tabular*}
+ \end{center}
+
+ To insert commands that are automatically executed before a
+ given column, load the 'array' package and use the '>{...}'
+ specifier.
'p{WD}'
- Produces a column with each item typeset in a parbox of width
- WD, as if it were the argument of a '\parbox[t]{WD}' command.
- However, a '\\' may not appear in the item, except in the
- following situations:
-
- 1. inside an environment like 'minipage', 'array', or
- 'tabular'.
- 2. inside an explicit '\parbox'.
- 3. in the scope of a '\centering', '\raggedright', or
- '\raggedleft' declaration. The latter declarations must
- appear inside braces or an environment when used in a
- 'p'-column element.
+ Each item in the column is typeset in a parbox of width WD.
+
+ Note that a line break double backslash '\\' may not appear in
+ the item, except inside an environment like 'minipage',
+ 'array', or 'tabular', or inside an explicit '\parbox', or in
+ the scope of a '\centering', '\raggedright', or '\raggedleft'
+ declaration (when used in a 'p'-column element these
+ declarations must appear inside braces, as with '{\centering
+ .. \\ ..}'). Otherwise LaTeX will misinterpret the double
+ backslash as ending the row.
'*{NUM}{COLS}'
Equivalent to NUM copies of COLS, where NUM is a positive
- integer and COLS is any list of column-specifiers, which may
- contain another '*-expression'.
+ integer and COLS is a list of specifiers. Thus
+ '\begin{tabular}{|*{3}{l|r}|}' is equivalent to
+ '\begin{tabular}{|l|rl|rl|r|}'. Note that COLS may contain
+ another '*-expression'.
Parameters that control formatting:
'\arrayrulewidth'
- Thickness of the rule created by '|', '\hline', and '\vline' in the
- 'tabular' and 'array' environments; the default is '.4pt'.
+ A length that is the thickness of the rule created by '|',
+ '\hline', and '\vline' in the 'tabular' and 'array' environments.
+ The default is '.4pt'. Change it as in
+ '\setlength{\arrayrulewidth}{0.8pt}'.
'\arraystretch'
- Scaling of spacing between rows in the 'tabular' and 'array'
- environments; default is '1', for no scaling.
+ A factor by which the spacing between rows in the 'tabular' and
+ 'array' environments is multiplied. The default is '1', for no
+ scaling. Change it as '\renewcommand{\arraystretch}{1.2}'.
'\doublerulesep'
- Horizontal distance between the vertical rules produced by '||' in
- the 'tabular' and 'array' environments; default is '2pt'.
+ A length that is the distance between the vertical rules produced
+ by the '||' specifier. The default is '2pt'.
'\tabcolsep'
- Half the width of the space between columns; default is '6pt'.
+ A length that is half of the space between columns. The default is
+ '6pt'. Change it with '\setlength'.
- The following commands can be used inside a 'tabular' environment:
+ The following commands can be used inside the body of a 'tabular'
+environment, the first two inside an entry and the second two between
+lines:
* Menu:
* \multicolumn:: Make an item spanning several columns.
+* \vline:: Draw a vertical line.
* \cline:: Draw a horizontal line spanning some columns.
* \hline:: Draw a horizontal line spanning all columns.
-* \vline:: Draw a vertical line.

-File: latex2e.info, Node: \multicolumn, Next: \cline, Up: tabular
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \multicolumn, Next: \vline, Up: tabular
-8.24.1 '\multicolumn'
+8.23.1 '\multicolumn'
---------------------
Synopsis:
- \multicolumn{COLS}{POS}{TEXT}
-
- The '\multicolumn' command makes an entry that spans several columns.
-The first mandatory argument, COLS, specifies the number of columns to
-span. The second mandatory argument, POS, specifies the formatting of
-the entry; 'c' for centered, 'l' for flushleft, 'r' for flushright. The
-third mandatory argument, TEXT, specifies what text to put in the entry.
-
- Here's an example showing two columns separated by an en-dash;
-'\multicolumn' is used for the heading:
-
- \begin{tabular}{r@{--}l}
- \multicolumn{2}{c}{\bf Unicode}\cr
- 0x80&0x7FF \cr
- 0x800&0xFFFF \cr
- 0x10000&0x1FFFF \cr
+
+ \multicolumn{NUMCOLS}{COLS}{TEXT}
+
+ Make an 'array' or 'tabular' entry that spans several columns. The
+first argument NUMCOLS gives the number of columns to span. The second
+argument COLS specifies the formatting of the entry, with 'c' for
+centered, 'l' for flush left, or 'r' for flush right. The third
+argument TEXT gives the contents of that entry.
+
+ In this example, in the first row, the second and third columns are
+spanned by the single heading 'Name'.
+
+ \begin{tabular}{lccl}
+ \textit{ID} &\multicolumn{2}{c}{\textit{Name}} &\textit{Age} \\ \hline % row one
+ 978-0-393-03701-2 &O'Brian &Patrick &55 \\ % row two
+ ..
+ \end{tabular}
+
+ What counts as a column is: the column format specifier for the
+'array' or 'tabular' environment is broken into parts, where each part
+(except the first) begins with 'l', 'c', 'r', or 'p'. So from
+'\begin{tabular}{|r|ccp{1.5in}|}' the parts are '|r|', 'c', 'c',
+and 'p{1.5in}|'.
+
+ The COLS argument overrides the 'array' or 'tabular' environment's
+intercolumn area default adjoining this multicolumn entry. To affect
+that area, this argument can contain vertical bars '|' indicating the
+placement of vertical rules, and '@{..}' expressions. Thus if COLS is
+'|c|' then this multicolumn entry will be centered and a vertical rule
+will come in the intercolumn area before it and after it. This table
+details the exact behavior.
+
+ \begin{tabular}{|cc|c|c|}
+ \multicolumn{1}{r}{w} % entry one
+ &\multicolumn{1}{|r|}{x} % entry two
+ &\multicolumn{1}{|r}{y} % entry three
+ &z % entry four
+ \end{tabular}
+ Before the first entry the output will not have a vertical rule
+because the '\multicolumn' has the COLS specifier 'r' with no initial
+vertical bar. Between entry one and entry two there will be a vertical
+rule; although the first COLS does not have an ending vertical bar, the
+second COLS does have a starting one. Between entry two and entry three
+there is a single vertical rule; despite that the COLS in both of the
+surrounding 'multicolumn''s call for a vertical rule, you only get one
+rule. Between entry three and entry four there is no vertical rule; the
+default calls for one but the COLS in the entry three '\multicolumn'
+leaves it out, and that takes precedence. Finally, following entry four
+there is a vertical rule because of the default.
+
+ The number of spanned columns NUMCOLS can be 1. Besides giving the
+ability to change the horizontal alignment, this also is useful to
+override for one row the 'tabular' definition's default intercolumn area
+specification, including the placement of vertical rules.
+
+ In the example below, in the 'tabular' definition the first column is
+specified to default to left justified but in the first row the entry is
+centered with '\multicolumn{1}{c}{\textsc{Period}}'. Also in the first
+row, the second and third columns are spanned by a single entry with
+'\multicolumn{2}{c}{\textsc{Span}}', overriding the specification to
+center those two columns on the page range en-dash.
+
+ \begin{tabular}{l|r@{--}l}
+ \multicolumn{1}{c}{\textsc{Period}}
+ &multicolumn{2}{c}{\textsc{Span}} \\ \hline
+ Baroque &1600 &1760 \\
+ Classical &1730 &1820 \\
+ Romantic &1780 &1910 \\
+ Impressionistic &1875 &1925
+ \end{tabular}
+
+ Note that although the 'tabular' specification by default puts a
+vertical rule between the first and second columns, because there is no
+vertical bar in the COLS of either of the first row's '\multicolumn'
+commands, no rule appears in the first row.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \vline, Next: \cline, Prev: \multicolumn, Up: tabular
+
+8.23.2 '\vline'
+---------------
+
+Draw a vertical line in a 'tabular' or 'array' environment extending the
+full height and depth of an entry's row. Can also be used in an
+@-expression, although its synonym vertical bar '|' is more common.
+This command is rarely used; typically a table's vertical lines are
+specified in 'tabular''s COLS argument and overriden as needed with
+'\multicolumn'.
+
+ This example illustrates some pitfalls. In the first line's second
+entry the '\hfill' moves the '\vline' to the left edge of the cell. But
+that is different than putting it halfway between the two columns, so in
+that row between the first and second columns there are two vertical
+rules, with the one from the '{c|cc}' specifier coming before the one
+produced by the '\vline\hfill'. In contrast, the first line's third
+entry shows the usual way to put a vertical bar between two columns. In
+the second line, the 'ghi' is the widest entry in its column so in the
+'\vline\hfill' the '\hfill' has no effect and the vertical line in that
+entry appears immediately next to the 'g', with no whitespace.
+
+ \begin{tabular}{c|cc}
+ x &\vline\hfill y &\multicolumn{1}{|r}{z} \\
+ abc &def &\vline\hfill ghi
\end{tabular}

-File: latex2e.info, Node: \cline, Next: \hline, Prev: \multicolumn, Up: tabular
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \cline, Next: \hline, Prev: \vline, Up: tabular
-8.24.2 '\cline'
+8.23.3 '\cline'
---------------
Synopsis:
\cline{I-J}
- The '\cline' command draws horizontal lines across the columns
-specified, beginning in column I and ending in column J, which are
-specified in the mandatory argument.
-
-
-File: latex2e.info, Node: \hline, Next: \vline, Prev: \cline, Up: tabular
+ Draw a horizontal rule in an 'array' or 'tabular' environment
+beginning in column I and ending in column J. The dash '-' must appear
+in the mandatory argument. To span a single column use the number
+twice.
-8.24.3 '\hline'
----------------
+ This example puts two horizontal lines between the first and second
+rows, one line in the first column only, and the other spanning the
+third and fourth columns. The two lines are side-by-side, at the same
+height.
-The '\hline' command draws a horizontal line the width of the enclosing
-'tabular' or 'array' environment. It's most commonly used to draw a
-line at the top, bottom, and between the rows of a table.
+ \begin{tabular}{llrr}
+ a &b &c &d \\ \cline{1-1} \cline{3-4}
+ e &f &g &h
+ \end{tabular}

-File: latex2e.info, Node: \vline, Prev: \hline, Up: tabular
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \hline, Prev: \cline, Up: tabular
-8.24.4 '\vline'
+8.23.4 '\hline'
---------------
-The '\vline' command will draw a vertical line extending the full height
-and depth of its row. An '\hfill' command can be used to move the line
-to the edge of the column. It can also be used in an @-expression.
+Draws a horizontal line the width of the enclosing 'tabular' or 'array'
+environment. It's most commonly used to draw a line at the top, bottom,
+and between the rows of a table.
+
+ In this example the top of the table has two horizontal rules, one
+above the other, that span both columns. The bottom of the table has a
+single rule spanning both columns. Because of the '\hline', the
+'tabular' second row's line ending double backslash '\\' is required.
+
+ \begin{tabular}{ll} \hline\hline
+ Baseball &Red Sox \\
+ Basketball &Celtics \\ \hline
+ \end{tabular}

File: latex2e.info, Node: thebibliography, Next: theorem, Prev: tabular, Up: Environments
-8.25 'thebibliography'
+8.24 'thebibliography'
======================
Synopsis:
@@ -2425,10 +3226,11 @@ references, '99' for ones with less than 100, etc.

File: latex2e.info, Node: \bibitem, Next: \cite, Up: thebibliography
-8.25.1 '\bibitem'
+8.24.1 '\bibitem'
-----------------
Synopsis:
+
\bibitem[LABEL]{CITE_KEY}
The '\bibitem' command generates an entry labelled by LABEL. If the
@@ -2445,12 +3247,12 @@ next section) to produce the associated label.

File: latex2e.info, Node: \cite, Next: \nocite, Prev: \bibitem, Up: thebibliography
-8.25.2 '\cite'
+8.24.2 '\cite'
--------------
Synopsis:
- \cite[SUBCITE]{KEYS
+ \cite[SUBCITE]{KEYS}
The KEYS argument is a list of one or more citation keys, separated
by commas. This command generates an in-text citation to the references
@@ -2462,18 +3264,18 @@ For example, '\cite[p.~314]{knuth}' might produce '[Knuth, p. 314]'.

File: latex2e.info, Node: \nocite, Next: Using BibTeX, Prev: \cite, Up: thebibliography
-8.25.3 '\nocite'
+8.24.3 '\nocite'
----------------
-'\nocite{key_list}'
+'\nocite{KEYS}'
- The '\nocite' command produces no text, but writes 'key_list', which
-is a list of one or more citation keys, on the '.aux' file.
+ The '\nocite' command produces no text, but writes KEYS, which is a
+list of one or more citation keys, to the '.aux' file.

File: latex2e.info, Node: Using BibTeX, Prev: \nocite, Up: thebibliography
-8.25.4 Using BibTeX
+8.24.4 Using BibTeX
-------------------
If you use the BibTeX program by Oren Patashnik (highly recommended if
@@ -2513,7 +3315,7 @@ the bibliography.

File: latex2e.info, Node: theorem, Next: titlepage, Prev: thebibliography, Up: Environments
-8.26 'theorem'
+8.25 'theorem'
==============
Synopsis:
@@ -2529,7 +3331,7 @@ under '\newtheorem' (*note \newtheorem::).

File: latex2e.info, Node: titlepage, Next: verbatim, Prev: theorem, Up: Environments
-8.27 'titlepage'
+8.26 'titlepage'
================
Synopsis:
@@ -2549,7 +3351,7 @@ a standard title page without a 'titlepage' environment.

File: latex2e.info, Node: verbatim, Next: verse, Prev: titlepage, Up: Environments
-8.28 'verbatim'
+8.27 'verbatim'
===============
Synopsis:
@@ -2573,7 +3375,7 @@ typewriter.

File: latex2e.info, Node: \verb, Up: verbatim
-8.28.1 '\verb'
+8.27.1 '\verb'
--------------
Synopsis:
@@ -2593,7 +3395,7 @@ space" character.

File: latex2e.info, Node: verse, Prev: verbatim, Up: Environments
-8.29 'verse'
+8.28 'verse'
============
Synopsis:
@@ -2623,9 +3425,8 @@ your input file into a sequence of glyphs and spaces. To produce a
printed document, this sequence must be broken into lines (and these
lines must be broken into pages).
- LaTeX usually does the line (and page) breaking for you, but in some
-environments, you do the line breaking yourself with the '\\' command,
-and you can always manually force breaks.
+ LaTeX usually does the line (and page) breaking in the text body for
+you but in some environments you manually force line breaks.
* Menu:
@@ -2641,15 +3442,37 @@ and you can always manually force breaks.

File: latex2e.info, Node: \\, Next: \obeycr & \restorecr, Up: Line breaking
-9.1 '\\'[*][MORESPACE]
-======================
+9.1 '\\'
+========
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \\[MORESPACE]
-The '\\' command tells LaTeX to start a new line. It has an optional
-argument, MORESPACE, that specifies how much extra vertical space is to
-be inserted before the next line. This can be a negative amount.
+ or
- The '\\*' command is the same as the ordinary '\\' command except
-that it tells LaTeX not to start a new page after the line.
+ \\*[MORESPACE]
+
+ Start a new line. The optional argument MORESPACE specifies extra
+vertical space to be insert before the next line. This can be a
+negative length. The text before the break is set at its normal length,
+that is, it is not stretched to fill out the line width.
+
+ Explicit line breaks in the text body are unusual in LaTeX. In
+particular, to start a new paragraph instead leave a blank line. This
+command is mostly used outside of the main flow of text such as in a
+'tabular' or 'array' environment.
+
+ Under ordinary circumstances (e.g., outside of a 'p{..}' column in a
+'tabular' environment) the '\newline' command is a synonym for '\\'
+(*note \newline::).
+
+ In addition to starting a new line, the starred form '\\*' tells
+LaTeX not to start a new page between the two lines, by issuing a
+'\nobreak'.
+
+ \title{My story: \\[0.25in]
+ a tale of woe}

File: latex2e.info, Node: \obeycr & \restorecr, Next: \newline, Prev: \\, Up: Line breaking
@@ -2669,9 +3492,23 @@ File: latex2e.info, Node: \newline, Next: \- (hyphenation), Prev: \obeycr & \
9.3 '\newline'
==============
-The '\newline' command breaks the line at the present point, with no
-stretching of the text before it. It can only be used in paragraph
-mode.
+In ordinary text this is equivalent to double-backslash (*note \\::); it
+breaks a line, with no stretching of the text before it.
+
+ Inside a 'tabular' or 'array' environment, in a column with a
+specifier producing a paragraph box, like typically 'p{..}', '\newline'
+will insert a line break inside of the column, that is, it does not
+break the entire row. To break the entire row use '\\' or its
+equivalent '\tabularnewline'.
+
+ This will print 'Name:' and 'Address:' as two lines in a single cell
+of the table.
+
+ \begin{tabular}{p{1in}{\hspace{2in}}p{1in}}
+ Name: \newline Address: &Date: \\ \hline
+ \end{tabular}
+
+ The 'Date:' will be baseline-aligned with 'Name:'.

File: latex2e.info, Node: \- (hyphenation), Next: \fussy, Prev: \newline, Up: Line breaking
@@ -2775,10 +3612,11 @@ File: latex2e.info, Node: \cleardoublepage, Next: \clearpage, Up: Page breaki
10.1 '\cleardoublepage'
=======================
-The '\cleardoublepage' command ends the current page and causes all
-figures and tables that have so far appeared in the input to be printed.
-In a two-sided printing style, it also makes the next page a right-hand
-(odd-numbered) page, producing a blank page if necessary.
+The '\cleardoublepage' command ends the current page and causes all the
+pending floating figures and tables that have so far appeared in the
+input to be printed. In a two-sided printing style, it also makes the
+next page a right-hand (odd-numbered) page, producing a blank page if
+necessary.

File: latex2e.info, Node: \clearpage, Next: \newpage, Prev: \cleardoublepage, Up: Page breaking
@@ -2786,8 +3624,9 @@ File: latex2e.info, Node: \clearpage, Next: \newpage, Prev: \cleardoublepage,
10.2 '\clearpage'
=================
-The '\clearpage' command ends the current page and causes all figures
-and tables that have so far appeared in the input to be printed.
+The '\clearpage' command ends the current page and causes all the
+pending floating figures and tables that have so far appeared in the
+input to be printed.

File: latex2e.info, Node: \newpage, Next: \enlargethispage, Prev: \clearpage, Up: Page breaking
@@ -2796,7 +3635,7 @@ File: latex2e.info, Node: \newpage, Next: \enlargethispage, Prev: \clearpage,
===============
The '\newpage' command ends the current page, but does not clear floats
-(see '\clearpage' above).
+(*note \clearpage::).

File: latex2e.info, Node: \enlargethispage, Next: \pagebreak & \nopagebreak, Prev: \newpage, Up: Page breaking
@@ -2809,7 +3648,7 @@ File: latex2e.info, Node: \enlargethispage, Next: \pagebreak & \nopagebreak,
'\enlargethispage*{size}'
Enlarge the '\textheight' for the current page by the specified
-amount; e.g. '\enlargethispage{\baselineskip}' will allow one
+amount; e.g., '\enlargethispage{\baselineskip}' will allow one
additional line.
The starred form tries to squeeze the material together on the page
@@ -2842,17 +3681,31 @@ File: latex2e.info, Node: Footnotes, Next: Definitions, Prev: Page breaking,
11 Footnotes
************
-Footnotes can be produced in one of two ways. They can be produced with
-one command, the '\footnote' command. They can also be produced with
-two commands, the '\footnotemark' and the '\footnotetext' commands.
+Place a numbered footnote at the bottom of the current page, as here.
+
+ Noe"l Coward quipped that having to read a footnote is like having
+ to go downstairs to answer the door, while in the midst of making
+ love.\footnote{I wouldn't know, I don't read footnotes.}
+
+ You can place multiple footnotes on a page. If the text becomes too
+long it will flow to the next page.
+
+ You can also produce footnotes by combining the '\footnotemark' and
+the '\footnotetext' commands, which is useful in special circumstances.
+
+ To make bibliographic references come out as footnotes you need to
+include a bibliographic style with that behavior.
* Menu:
-* \footnote:: Insert a footnote.
-* \footnotemark:: Insert footnote mark only.
-* \footnotetext:: Insert footnote text only.
-* Symbolic footnotes:: Using symbols instead of numbers for footnotes.
-* Footnote parameters:: Parameters for footnote formatting.
+* \footnote:: Insert a footnote.
+* \footnotemark:: Insert footnote mark only.
+* \footnotetext:: Insert footnote text only.
+* Footnotes in a table:: Table footnotes.
+* Footnotes in section headings:: Chapter or section titles.
+* Footnotes of footnotes:: Multiple classes of footnotes.
+* Multiple reference to footnotes:: Referring to a footnote more than once.
+* Footnote parameters:: Parameters for footnote formatting.

File: latex2e.info, Node: \footnote, Next: \footnotemark, Up: Footnotes
@@ -2864,13 +3717,36 @@ Synopsis:
\footnote[NUMBER]{TEXT}
- The '\footnote' command places the numbered footnote TEXT at the
-bottom of the current page. The optional argument NUMBER changes the
-default footnote number.
+ Place a numbered footnote TEXT at the bottom of the current page.
+
+ There are over a thousand footnotes in Gibbon's
+ \textit{Decline and Fall of the Roman Empire}.\footnote{After
+ reading an early version with endnotes David Hume complained,
+ ``One is also plagued with his Notes, according to the present Method
+ of printing the Book'' and suggested that they ``only to be printed
+ at the Margin or the Bottom of the Page.''}
+
+ The optional argument NUMBER allows you to specify the footnote
+number. If you use this option then the footnote number counter is not
+incremented, and if you do not use it then the counter is incremented.
+
+ Change how LaTeX shows the footnote counter with something like
+'\renewcommand{\thefootnote}{\fnsymbol{footnote}}', which uses a
+sequence of symbols (*note \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman
+\fnsymbol::). To make this change global put that in the preamble. If
+you make the change local then you may want to reset the counter with
+'\setcounter{footnote}{0}'. By default LaTeX uses arabic numbers.
+
+ LaTeX's default puts many restrictions on where you can use a
+'\footnote'; for instance, you cannot use it in an argument to a
+sectioning command such as '\chapter' (it can only be used in outer
+paragraph mode). There are some workarounds; see following sections.
- This command can only be used in outer paragraph mode; i.e., you
-cannot use it in sectioning commands like '\chapter', in figures, tables
-or in a 'tabular' environment. (See following sections.)
+ In a 'minipage' environment the '\footnote' command uses the
+'mpfootnote' counter instead of the 'footnote' counter, so they are
+numbered independently. They are shown at the bottom of the
+environment, not at the bottom of the page. And by default they are
+shown alphabetically. *Note minipage::.

File: latex2e.info, Node: \footnotemark, Next: \footnotetext, Prev: \footnote, Up: Footnotes
@@ -2878,55 +3754,171 @@ File: latex2e.info, Node: \footnotemark, Next: \footnotetext, Prev: \footnote
11.2 '\footnotemark'
====================
-With no optional argument, the '\footnotemark' command puts the current
-footnote number in the text. This command can be used in inner
-paragraph mode. You give the text of the footnote separately, with the
-'\footnotetext' command.
+Synopsis, one of:
- This command can be used to produce several consecutive footnote
-markers referring to the same footnote with
+ \footnotemark
+ \footnotemark[NUMBER]
- \footnotemark[\value{footnote}]
+ Put the current footnote number in the text. (See *note
+\footnotetext:: for giving the text of the footnote separately.) The
+version with the optional argument NUMBER uses that number to determine
+the mark printed. This command can be used in inner paragraph mode.
-after the first '\footnote' command.
+ This example gives the same institutional affiliation to both the
+first and third authors ('\thanks' is a version of 'footnote').
+
+ \title{A Treatise on the Binomial Theorem}
+ \author{J Moriarty\thanks{University of Leeds}
+ \and A C Doyle\thanks{Durham University}
+ \and S Holmes\footnotemark[1]}
+ \begin{document}
+ \maketitle
+
+ If you use '\footnotemark' without the optional argument then it
+increments the footnote counter but if you use the optional NUMBER then
+it does not. This produces several consecutive footnote markers
+referring to the same footnote.
+
+ The first theorem\footnote{Due to Gauss.}
+ and the second theorem\footnotemark[\value{footnote}]
+ and the third theorem.\footnotemark[\value{footnote}]

-File: latex2e.info, Node: \footnotetext, Next: Symbolic footnotes, Prev: \footnotemark, Up: Footnotes
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \footnotetext, Next: Footnotes in a table, Prev: \footnotemark, Up: Footnotes
11.3 '\footnotetext'
====================
-Synopsis:
+Synopsis, one of:
+ \footnotetext{TEXT}
\footnotetext[NUMBER]{TEXT}
- The '\footnotetext' command places TEXT at the bottom of the page as
-a footnote. This command can come anywhere after the '\footnotemark'
-command. The '\footnotetext' command must appear in outer paragraph
-mode.
+ Place TEXT at the bottom of the page as a footnote. This command can
+come anywhere after the '\footnotemark' command. The optional argument
+NUMBER changes the displayed footnote number. The '\footnotetext'
+command must appear in outer paragraph mode.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: Footnotes in a table, Next: Footnotes in section headings, Prev: \footnotetext, Up: Footnotes
+
+11.4 Footnotes in a table
+=========================
+
+Inside a 'table' environment the '\footnote' command does not work. For
+instance, if the code below appears on its own then the footnote simply
+disappears; there is a footnote mark in the table cell but nothing is
+set at the bottom of the page.
+
+ \begin{center}
+ \begin{tabular}{l|l}
+ \textsc{Ship} &\textsc{Book} \\ \hline
+ \textit{HMS Sophie} &Master and Commander \\
+ \textit{HMS Polychrest} &Post Captain \\
+ \textit{HMS Lively} &Post Captain \\
+ \textit{HMS Surprise} &A number of books\footnote{Starting with HMS Surprise.}
+ \end{tabular}
+ \end{center}
+
+ The solution is to surround the 'tabular' environment with a
+'minipage' environment, as here (*note minipage::).
+
+ \begin{center}
+ \begin{minipage}{.5\textwidth}
+ .. tabular material ..
+ \end{minipage}
+ \end{center}
- The optional argument NUMBER changes the default footnote number.
+ The same technique will work inside a floating 'table' environment
+(*note table::). To get the footnote at the bottom of the page use the
+'tablefootnote' package, as illustrated in this example. If you put
+'\usepackage{tablefootnote}' in the preamble and use the code shown then
+the footnote appears at the bottom and is numbered in sequence with
+other footnotes.
+
+ \begin{table}
+ \centering
+ \begin{tabular}{l|l}
+ \textsc{Date} &\textsc{Campaign} \\ \hline
+ 1862 &Fort Donelson \\
+ 1863 &Vicksburg \\
+ 1865 &Army of Northern Virginia\footnote{Ending the war.}
+ \end{tabular}
+ \caption{Forces captured by US Grant}
+ \end{table}

-File: latex2e.info, Node: Symbolic footnotes, Next: Footnote parameters, Prev: \footnotetext, Up: Footnotes
+File: latex2e.info, Node: Footnotes in section headings, Next: Footnotes of footnotes, Prev: Footnotes in a table, Up: Footnotes
-11.4 Symbolic footnotes
-=======================
+11.5 Footnotes in section headings
+==================================
+
+Putting a footnote in a section heading
+
+ \section{Full sets\protect\footnote{This material is due to R~Jones.}}
+
+ causes the footnote to appear both at the bottom of the page where
+the section starts and at the bottom of the table of contents page. To
+have it not appear on the table of contents use the package 'footmisc'
+with the 'stable' option.
+
+ \usepackage[stable]{footmisc}
+ ..
+ \begin{document}
+ ..
+ \section{Full sets\footnote{This material is due to R~Jones.}}
+
+ Note that the '\protect' is gone; putting it in causes the footnote
+to reappear on the table of contents.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: Footnotes of footnotes, Next: Multiple reference to footnotes, Prev: Footnotes in section headings, Up: Footnotes
+
+11.6 Footnotes of footnotes
+===========================
+
+Particularly in the humanities, authors can have multiple classes of
+footnotes, including having footnotes of footnotes. The package
+'bigfoot' extends LaTeX's default footnote mechanism in many ways,
+including allow these two, as in this example.
+
+ \usepackage{bigfoot}
+ \DeclareNewFootnote{Default}
+ \DeclareNewFootnote{from}[alph] % create class \footnotefrom{}
+ ..
+ \begin{document}
+ ..
+ The third theorem is a partial converse of the
+ second.\footnotefrom{First noted in Wilson.\footnote{Second edition only.}}
+ ..
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: Multiple reference to footnotes, Next: Footnote parameters, Prev: Footnotes of footnotes, Up: Footnotes
-If you want to use symbols for footnotes, rather than increasing
-numbers, redefine '\thefootnote' like this:
+11.7 Multiple references to footnotes
+=====================================
+
+You can refer to a single footnote more than once. This example uses
+the package 'cleverref'.
- \renewcommand{\thefootnote}{\fnsymbol{footnote}}
+ \usepackage{cleveref}[2012/02/15] % this version of package or later
+ \crefformat{footnote}{#2\footnotemark[#1]#3}
+ ..
+ \begin{document}
+ ..
+ The theorem is from Evers.\footnote{\label{fn:TE}Tinker and Evers, 1994.}
+ The corollary is from Chance.\footnote{Evers and Chance, 1990.}
+ But the key lemma is from Tinker.\cref{fn:TE}
+ ..
- The '\fnsymbol' command produces a predefined series of symbols
-(*note \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol::). If you want to
-use a different symbol as your footnote mark, you'll need to also
-redefine '\@fnsymbol'.
+ This solution will work with the package 'hyperref'. See *note
+\footnotemark:: for a simpler solution in the common case of multiple
+authors with the same affiliation.

-File: latex2e.info, Node: Footnote parameters, Prev: Symbolic footnotes, Up: Footnotes
+File: latex2e.info, Node: Footnote parameters, Prev: Multiple reference to footnotes, Up: Footnotes
-11.5 Footnote parameters
+11.8 Footnote parameters
========================
'\footnoterule'
@@ -2952,17 +3944,18 @@ LaTeX has support for making new commands of many different kinds.
* Menu:
-* \newcommand & \renewcommand:: (Re)define a new command.
-* \newcounter:: Define a new counter.
-* \newlength:: Define a new length.
-* \newsavebox:: Define a new box.
-* \newenvironment & \renewenvironment:: Define a new environment.
-* \newtheorem:: Define a new 'theorem'-like environment.
-* \newfont:: Define a new font name.
-* \protect:: Using tricky commands.
+* \newcommand & \renewcommand:: (Re)define a new command.
+* \providecommand:: Define a new command, if name not used.
+* \newcounter:: Define a new counter.
+* \newlength:: Define a new length.
+* \newsavebox:: Define a new box.
+* \newenvironment & \renewenvironment:: Define a new environment.
+* \newtheorem:: Define a new theorem-like environment.
+* \newfont:: Define a new font name.
+* \protect:: Using tricky commands.

-File: latex2e.info, Node: \newcommand & \renewcommand, Next: \newcounter, Up: Definitions
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \newcommand & \renewcommand, Next: \providecommand, Up: Definitions
12.1 '\newcommand' & '\renewcommand'
====================================
@@ -2970,199 +3963,474 @@ File: latex2e.info, Node: \newcommand & \renewcommand, Next: \newcounter, Up:
'\newcommand' and '\renewcommand' define and redefine a command,
respectively. Synopses:
- \newcommand[*]{CMD}[NARGS][OPTARGVAL]{DEFN}
- \renewcommand[*]{CMD}[NARGS][OPTARGVAL]{DEFN}
+ \newcommand{CMD}[NARGS][OPTARGDEFAULT]{DEFN}
+ \newcommand*{CMD}[NARGS][OPTARGDEFAULT]{DEFN}
+ \renewcommand{CMD}[NARGS][OPTARGDEFAULT]{DEFN}
+ \renewcommand*{CMD}[NARGS][OPTARGDEFAULT]{DEFN}
-'*'
- The *-form of these commands requires that the arguments not
- contain multiple paragraphs of text (not '\long', in plain TeX
- terms).
+ The '*'-form of these two commands requires that the arguments not
+contain multiple paragraphs of text (not '\long', in plain TeX terms).
CMD
- The command name, beginning with '\'. For '\newcommand', it must
- not be already defined and must not begin with '\end'; for
- '\renewcommand', it must already be defined.
+ Required; the command name. It must begin with '\'. For
+ '\newcommand', it must not be already defined and must not begin
+ with '\end'. For '\renewcommand', it must already be defined.
NARGS
- An optional integer from 1 to 9 specifying the number of arguments
- that the command will take. The default is for the command to have
- no arguments.
-
-OPTARGVAL
- If this optional parameter is present, it means that the first
- argument of command CMD is optional and its default value (i.e., if
- it is not specified in the call) is OPTARG. In otherwise, when
- calling the macro, if no '[VALUE]' is given after 'CMD'--which is
- different from having '[]' for an empty VALUE--then string
- 'OPTARGVAL' becomes the value of '#1' within DEFN when the macro is
- expanded.
+ Optional; an integer from 0 to 9, specifying the number of
+ arguments that the command will take. If this argument is not
+ present, the default is for the command to have no arguments. When
+ redefining a command, the new version can have a different number
+ of arguments than the old version.
+
+OPTARGDEFAULT
+ Optional; if this argument is present then the first argument of
+ defined command \CMD is optional, with default value OPTARGDEFAULT
+ (which may be the empty string). If this argument is not present
+ then \CMD does not take an optional argument.
+
+ That is, if \CMD is used with square brackets following, as in
+ '\CMD[MYVAL]', then within DEFN '#1' expands MYVAL. While if \CMD
+ is called without square brackets following, then within DEFN the
+ '#1' expands to the default OPTARGDEFAULT. In either case, any
+ required arguments will be referred to starting with '#2'.
+
+ Omitting '[MYVAL]' in the call is different from having the square
+ brackets with no contents, as in '[]'. The former results in '#1'
+ expanding to OPTARGDEFAULT; the latter results in '#1' expanding to
+ the empty string.
DEFN
The text to be substituted for every occurrence of 'cmd'; a
construct of the form '#N' in DEFN is replaced by the text of the
Nth argument.
+ A command with no arguments that is followed in the source by a space
+will swallow that space. The solution is to type '{}' after the command
+and before the space.
+
+ A simple example of defining a new command: '\newcommand{\JH}{Jim
+Hef{}feron}' causes the abbreviation '\JH' to be replaced by the longer
+text.
+
+ Redefining a command is basically the same:
+'\renewcommand{\qedsymbol}{{\small QED}}'.
+
+ Here's a command definition that uses arguments:
+
+ \newcommand{\defreference}[1]{Definition~\ref{#1}}
+
+Then, '\defreference{def:basis}' will expand to something like
+'Definition~3.14'.
+
+ An example with two arguments:
+'\newcommand{\nbym}[2]{#1\!\times\!#2}' is invoked as '\nbym{2}{k}'.
+
+ An example with optional arguments:
+
+ \newcommand{\salutation}[1][Sir or Madam]{Dear #1:}
+
+Then, '\salutation' gives 'Dear Sir or Madam:' while '\salutation[John]'
+gives 'Dear John:'. And '\salutation[]' gives 'Dear :'.
+
+ The braces around DEFN do not delimit the scope of the result of
+expanding DEFN. So '\newcommand{\shipname}[1]{\it #1}' is wrong since
+in the sentence
+
+ The \shipname{Monitor} met the \shipname{Virginia}.
+
+the words 'met the' will incorrectly be in italics. An extra pair of
+braces '\newcommand{\shipname}[1]{{\it #1}}' fixes it.
+

-File: latex2e.info, Node: \newcounter, Next: \newlength, Prev: \newcommand & \renewcommand, Up: Definitions
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \providecommand, Next: \newcounter, Prev: \newcommand & \renewcommand, Up: Definitions
-12.2 '\newcounter'
-==================
+12.2 '\providecommand'
+======================
+
+Defines a command, as long as no command of this name already exists.
+Synopses:
+
+ \providecommand{CMD}[NARGS][OPTARGDEFAULT]{DEFN}
+ \providecommand*{CMD}[NARGS][OPTARGDEFAULT]{DEFN}
+
+ If no command of this name already exists then this has the same
+effect as '\newcommand' (*note \newcommand & \renewcommand::). If a
+command of this name already exists then this definition does nothing.
+This is particularly useful in a style file, or other file that may be
+loaded more than once.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \newcounter, Next: \newlength, Prev: \providecommand, Up: Definitions
+
+12.3 '\newcounter': Allocating a counter
+========================================
Synopsis:
\newcounter{COUNTERNAME}[SUPERCOUNTER]
- The '\newcounter' command defines a new counter named COUNTERNAME.
-The new counter is initialized to zero.
+ The '\newcounter' command globally defines a new counter named
+COUNTERNAME. The name consists of letters only and does not begin with
+a backslash ('\'). The name must not already be used by another
+counter. The new counter is initialized to zero.
- Given the optional argument '[SUPER]', COUNTERNAME will be reset
-whenever the counter named SUPERCOUNTER is incremented.
+ If the optional argument '[SUPERCOUNTER]' appears, then COUNTERNAME
+will be numbered within, or subsidiary to, the existing counter
+SUPERCOUNTER. For example, ordinarily 'subsection' is numbered within
+'section'. Any time SUPERCOUNTER is incremented with '\stepcounter'
+(*note \stepcounter::) or '\refstepcounter' (*note \refstepcounter::)
+then COUNTERNAME is reset to zero.
*Note Counters::, for more information about counters.

File: latex2e.info, Node: \newlength, Next: \newsavebox, Prev: \newcounter, Up: Definitions
-12.3 '\newlength'
-=================
+12.4 '\newlength': Allocating a length
+======================================
-Synopsis:
+Allocate a new "length" register. Synopsis:
\newlength{\ARG}
- The '\newlength' command defines the mandatory argument as a "length"
-command with a value of zero. The argument must be a control sequence,
-as in '\newlength{\foo}'. An error occurs if '\foo' is already defined.
+ This command takes one required argument, which must begin with a
+backslash ('\'). It creates a new length register named '\ARG', which
+is a place to hold (rubber) lengths such as '1in plus.2in minus.1in'
+(what plain TeX calls a 'skip' register). The register gets an initial
+value of zero. The control sequence '\ARG' must not already be defined.
- *Note Lengths::, for how to set the new length to a nonzero value,
-and for more information about lengths in general.
+ *Note Lengths::, for more about lengths.

File: latex2e.info, Node: \newsavebox, Next: \newenvironment & \renewenvironment, Prev: \newlength, Up: Definitions
-12.4 '\newsavebox'
-==================
+12.5 '\newsavebox': Allocating a box
+====================================
-Synopsis:
+Allocate a "bin" for holding a box. Synopsis:
+
+ \newsavebox{\CMD}
- \newsavebox{CMD}
+ Defines '\CMD' to refer to a new bin for storing boxes. Such a box
+is for holding typeset material, to use multiple times (*note Boxes::)
+or to measure or manipulate. The name '\CMD' must start with a
+backslash ('\'), and must not be already defined.
- Defines '\CMD', which must be a command name not already defined, to
-refer to a new bin for storing boxes.
+ The allocation of a box is global. This command is fragile (*note
+\protect::).

File: latex2e.info, Node: \newenvironment & \renewenvironment, Next: \newtheorem, Prev: \newsavebox, Up: Definitions
-12.5 '\newenvironment' & '\renewenvironment'
+12.6 '\newenvironment' & '\renewenvironment'
============================================
-Synopses:
-
- \newenvironment[*]{ENV}[NARGS][DEFAULT]{BEGDEF}{ENDDEF}
- \renewenvironment[*]{ENV}[NARGS]{BEGDEF}{ENDDEF}
+These commands define or redefine an environment ENV, that is,
+'\begin{ENV} ... \end{ENV}'. Synopses:
- These commands define or redefine an environment ENV, that is,
-'\begin{ENV} ... \end{ENV}'.
+ \newenvironment{ENV}[NARGS][OPTARGDEFAULT]{BEGDEFN}{ENDDEFN}
+ \newenvironment*{ENV}[NARGS][OPTARGDEFAULT]{BEGDEFN}{ENDDEFN}
+ \renewenvironment{ENV}[NARGS][OPTARGDEFAULT]{BEGDEFN}{ENDDEFN}
+ \renewenvironment*{ENV}[NARGS][OPTARGDEFAULT]{BEGDEFN}{ENDDEFN}
-'*'
- The *-form of these commands requires that the arguments (not the
- contents of the environment) not contain multiple paragraphs of
- text.
+ Unlike '\newcommand' and '\renewcommand', the '*'-forms
+'\newenvironment*' and '\renewcommand*' have the same effect as the
+forms with no '*'.
ENV
- The name of the environment. For '\newenvironment', ENV must not
- be an existing environment, and the command '\ENV' must be
+ Required; the environment name. It does not begin with backslash
+ ('\'). It must not begin with the string 'end'. For
+ '\newenvironment', the name ENV must not be the name of an already
+ existing environment, and also the command '\ENV' must be
undefined. For '\renewenvironment', ENV must be the name of an
existing environment.
NARGS
- An integer from 1 to 9 denoting the number of arguments of the
- newly-defined environment. The default is no arguments.
+ Optional; an integer from 0 to 9 denoting the number of arguments
+ of that the environment will take. These arguments appear after
+ the '\begin', as in '\begin{ENV}{ARG1}...{ARGN}'. If this argument
+ is not present then the default is for the environment to have no
+ arguments. When redefining an environment, the new version can
+ have a different number of arguments than the old version.
+
+OPTARGDEFAULT
+ Optional; if this argument is present then the first argument of
+ the defined environment is optional, with default value
+ OPTARGDEFAULT (which may be the empty string). If this argument is
+ not present then the environment does not take an optional
+ argument.
-DEFAULT
- If this is specified, the first argument is optional, and DEFAULT
- gives the default value for that argument.
+ That is, when '[OPTARGDEFAULT]' is present in the environment
+ definition, if '\begin{ENV}' is used with square brackets
+ following, as in '\begin{ENV}[MYVAL]', then within the environment
+ '#1' expands MYVAL. If '\begin{ENV}' is called without square
+ brackets following, then within the environment the '#1' expands to
+ the default OPTARGDEFAULT. In either case, any required arguments
+ will be referred to starting with '#2'.
+
+ Omitting '[MYVAL]' in the call is different from having the square
+ brackets with no contents, as in '[]'. The former results in '#1'
+ expanding to OPTARGDEFAULT; the latter results in '#1' expanding to
+ the empty string.
+
+BEGDEFN
+ Required; the text expanded at every occurrence of '\begin{ENV}'; a
+ construct of the form '#N' in BEGDEF is replaced by the text of the
+ Nth argument.
-BEGDEF
- The text expanded at every occurrence of '\begin{ENV}'; a construct
- of the form '#N' in BEGDEF is replaced by the text of the Nth
- argument.
+ENDDEFN
+ Required; the text expanded at every occurrence of '\end{ENV}'.
+ Note that it may not contain any argument parameters, so '#N'
+ cannot be used here.
+
+ The environment ENV delimits the scope of the result of expanding
+BEGDEFN and ENDDEFN. Thus, in the first example below, the effect of
+the '\small' is limited to the quote and does not extend to material
+following the environment.
+
+ This example gives an environment like LaTeX's 'quotation' except
+that it will be set in smaller type.
+
+ \newenvironment{smallquote}{%
+ \small\begin{quotation}
+ }{%
+ \end{quotation}
+ }
+
+ This shows the use of arguments; it gives a quotation environment
+that cites the author.
+
+ \newenvironment{citequote}[1][Shakespeare]{%
+ \begin{quotation}
+ \noindent\textit{#1}:
+ }{%
+ \end{quotation}
+ }
+
+The author's name is optional, and defaults to Shakespeare. In the
+document, use the environment as here:
+
+ \begin{citequote}[Lincoln]
+ ..
+ \end{citequote}
+
+ The final example shows how to save the value of an argument to use
+in ENDDEFN.
-ENDDEF
- The text expanded at every occurrence of '\end{ENV}'. It may not
- contain any argument parameters.
+ \newsavebox{\quoteauthor}
+ \newenvironment{citequote}[1][Shakespeare]{%
+ \sbox\quoteauthor{#1}%
+ \begin{quotation}
+ }{%
+ \hspace{1em plus 1fill}---\usebox{\quoteauthor}
+ \end{quotation}
+ }

File: latex2e.info, Node: \newtheorem, Next: \newfont, Prev: \newenvironment & \renewenvironment, Up: Definitions
-12.6 '\newtheorem'
+12.7 '\newtheorem'
==================
- \newtheorem{NEWENV}{LABEL}[WITHIN]
- \newtheorem{NEWENV}[NUMBERED_LIKE]{LABEL}
+Define a new "theorem-like environment". Synopses:
- This command defines a theorem-like environment. Arguments:
+ \newtheorem{NAME}{TITLE}[NUMBERED_WITHIN]
+ \newtheorem{NAME}[NUMBERED_LIKE]{TITLE}
-NEWENV
- The name of the environment to be defined; must not be the name of
- an existing environment or otherwise defined.
+ Both create a theorem-like environment NAME. Using the first form,
-LABEL
+ \newtheorem{NAME}{TITLE}[NUMBERED_WITHIN]
+
+with the optional argument after the second required argument, creates
+an environment whose counter is subordinate to the existing counter
+NUMBERED_WITHIN: it will be reset when NUMBERED_WITHIN is reset).
+
+ Using the second form,
+
+ \newtheorem{NAME}[NUMBERED_LIKE]{TITLE}
+
+with the optional argument between the two required arguments, will
+create an environment whose counter will share the previously defined
+counter NUMBERED_LIKE.
+
+ You can specify one of NUMBERED_WITHIN and NUMBERED_LIKE, or neither,
+but not both.
+
+ This command creates a counter named NAME. In addition, unless the
+optional argument NUMBERED_LIKE is used, the current '\ref' value will
+be that of '\theNUMBERED_WITHIN' (*note \ref::).
+
+ This declaration is global. It is fragile (*note \protect::).
+
+ Arguments:
+
+NAME
+ The name of the environment. It must not begin with a backslash
+ ('\'). It must not be the name of an existing environment; indeed,
+ the command name '\NAME' must not already be defined as anything.
+
+TITLE
The text printed at the beginning of the environment, before the
number. For example, 'Theorem'.
+NUMBERED_WITHIN
+ Optional; the name of an already defined counter, usually a
+ sectional unit such as 'chapter' or 'section'. When the
+ NUMBERED_WITHIN counter is reset then the NAME environment's
+ counter will also be reset.
+
+ If this optional argument is not used then the command '\theNAME'
+ is set to '\arabic{NAME}'.
+
NUMBERED_LIKE
- (Optional.) The name of an already defined theorem-like
- environment; the new environment will be numbered just like
+ Optional; the name of an already defined theorem-like environment.
+ The new environment will be numbered in sequence with
NUMBERED_LIKE.
-WITHIN
- (Optional.) The name of an already defined counter, a sectional
- unit. The new theorem counter will be reset at the same time as
- the WITHIN counter.
+ Without any optional arguments the environments are numbered
+sequentially. This example has a declaration in the preamble that
+results in 'Definition 1' and 'Definition 2' in the output.
- At most one of NUMBERED_LIKE and WITHIN can be specified, not both.
+ \newtheorem{defn}{Definition}
+ \begin{document}
+ \section{...}
+ \begin{defn}
+ First def
+ \end{defn}
+
+ \section{...}
+ \begin{defn}
+ Second def
+ \end{defn}
+
+ Because this example specifies the optional argument NUMBERED_WITHIN
+to '\newtheorem' as 'section', the example, with the same document body,
+gives 'Definition 1.1' and 'Definition 2.1'.
+
+ \newtheorem{defn}{Definition}[section]
+ \begin{document}
+ \section{...}
+ \begin{defn}
+ First def
+ \end{defn}
+
+ \section{...}
+ \begin{defn}
+ Second def
+ \end{defn}
+
+ In this example there are two declarations in the preamble, the
+second of which calls for the new 'thm' environment to use the same
+counter as 'defn'. It gives 'Definition 1.1', followed by 'Theorem 2.1'
+and 'Definition 2.2'.
+
+ \newtheorem{defn}{Definition}[section]
+ \newtheorem{thm}[defn]{Theorem}
+ \begin{document}
+ \section{...}
+ \begin{defn}
+ First def
+ \end{defn}
+
+ \section{...}
+ \begin{thm}
+ First thm
+ \end{thm}
+
+ \begin{defn}
+ Second def
+ \end{defn}

File: latex2e.info, Node: \newfont, Next: \protect, Prev: \newtheorem, Up: Definitions
-12.7 '\newfont'
-===============
+12.8 '\newfont': Define a new font (obsolete)
+=============================================
+'\newfont', now obsolete, defines a command that will switch fonts.
Synopsis:
- \newfont{CMD}{FONTNAME}
+ \newfont{\CMD}{FONT DESCRIPTION}
+
+ This defines a control sequence '\CMD' that will change the current
+font. LaTeX will look on your system for a file named 'FONTNAME.tfm'.
+The control sequence must must not already be defined. It must begin
+with a backslash ('\').
+
+ This command is obsolete. It is a low-level command for setting up
+an individual font. Today fonts are almost always defined in families
+(which allows you to, for example, associate a boldface with a roman)
+through the so-called "New Font Selection Scheme", either by using '.fd'
+files or through the use of an engine that can access system fonts such
+as XeLaTeX (*note TeX engines::).
+
+ But since it is part of LaTeX, here is an explanation: the FONT
+DESCRIPTION consists of a FONTNAME and an optional "at clause"; this can
+have the form either 'at DIMEN' or 'scaled FACTOR', where a FACTOR of
+'1000' means no scaling. For LaTeX's purposes, all this does is scale
+all the character and other font dimensions relative to the font's
+design size, which is a value defined in the '.tfm' file.
- Defines a control sequence '\CMD', which must not already be defined,
-to make FONTNAME be the current font. The file looked for on the system
-is named 'FONTNAME.tfm'.
+ This example defines two equivalent fonts and typesets a few
+characters in each:
- This is a low-level command for setting up to use an individual font.
-More commonly, fonts are defined in families through '.fd' files.
+ \newfont{\testfontat}{cmb10 at 11pt}
+ \newfont{\testfontscaled}{cmb10 scaled 11pt}
+ \testfontat abc
+ \testfontscaled abc

File: latex2e.info, Node: \protect, Prev: \newfont, Up: Definitions
-12.8 '\protect'
+12.9 '\protect'
===============
-Footnotes, line breaks, any command that has an optional argument, and
-many more are so-called "fragile" commands. When a fragile command is
-used in certain contexts, called "moving arguments", it must be preceded
-by '\protect'. In addition, any fragile commands within the arguments
-must have their own '\protect'.
-
- Some examples of moving arguments are '\caption' (*note figure::),
-'\thanks' (*note \maketitle::), and expressions in 'tabular' and 'array'
+All LaTeX commands are either "fragile" or "robust". Footnotes, line
+breaks, any command that has an optional argument, and many more, are
+fragile. A fragile command can break when it is used in the argument to
+certain commands. To prevent such commands from breaking they must be
+preceded by the command '\protect'.
+
+ For example, when LaTeX runs the '\section{SECTION NAME}' command it
+writes the SECTION NAME text to the '.aux' auxiliary file, moving it
+there for use elsewhere in the document such as in the table of
+contents. Any argument that is internally expanded by LaTeX without
+typesetting it directly is referred to as a "moving argument". A
+command is fragile if it can expand during this process into invalid TeX
+code. Some examples of moving arguments are those that appear in the
+'\caption{..}' command (*note figure::), in the '\thanks{..}' command
+(*note \maketitle::), and in @-expressions in the 'tabular' and 'array'
environments (*note tabular::).
- Commands which are not fragile are called "robust". They must not be
-preceded by '\protect'.
+ If you get strange errors from commands used in moving arguments, try
+preceding it with '\protect'. Every fragile commands must be protected
+with their own '\protect'.
+
+ Although usually a '\protect' command doesn't hurt, length commands
+are robust and should not be preceded by a '\protect' command. Nor can
+a '\protect' command be used in the argument to '\addtocounter' or
+'\setcounter' command.
+
+ In this example the 'caption' command gives a mysterious error about
+an extra curly brace. Fix the problem by preceding each '\raisebox'
+command with '\protect'.
- See also:
+ \begin{figure}
+ ..
+ \caption{Company headquarters of A\raisebox{1pt}{B}\raisebox{-1pt}{C}}
+ \end{figure}
+
+ In the next example the '\tableofcontents' command gives an error
+because the '\(..\)' in the section title expands to illegal TeX in the
+'.toc' file. You can solve this by changing '\(..\)' to
+'\protect\(..\protect\)'.
-<http://www-h.eng.cam.ac.uk/help/tpl/textprocessing/teTeX/latex/latex2e-html/fragile.html>
-<http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=protect>
+ \begin{document}
+ \tableofcontents
+ ..
+ \section{Einstein's \( e=mc^2 \)}
+ ..

File: latex2e.info, Node: Counters, Next: Lengths, Prev: Definitions, Up: Top
@@ -3171,10 +4439,11 @@ File: latex2e.info, Node: Counters, Next: Lengths, Prev: Definitions, Up: To
***********
Everything LaTeX numbers for you has a counter associated with it. The
-name of the counter is the same as the name of the environment or
-command that produces the number, except with no '\'. ('enumi'-'enumiv'
-are used for the nested enumerate environment.) Below is a list of the
-counters used in LaTeX's standard document classes to control numbering.
+name of the counter is often the same as the name of the environment or
+command associated with the number, except with no backslash ('\').
+Thus the '\chapter' command starts a chapter and the 'chapter' counter
+keeps track of the chapter number. Below is a list of the counters used
+in LaTeX's standard document classes to control numbering.
part paragraph figure enumi
chapter subparagraph table enumii
@@ -3182,6 +4451,14 @@ counters used in LaTeX's standard document classes to control numbering.
subsection equation mpfootnote enumiv
subsubsection
+ The 'mpfootnote' counter is used by the '\footnote' command inside of
+a minipage (*note minipage::).
+
+ The 'enumi' through 'enumiv' counters are used in the 'enumerate'
+environment, for up to four nested levels (*note enumerate::).
+
+ New counters are created with '\newcounter'. *Note \newcounter::.
+
* Menu:
* \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol:: Print value of a counter.
@@ -3200,7 +4477,8 @@ File: latex2e.info, Node: \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol, Next: \
=====================================================================
All of these commands take a single counter as an argument, for
-instance, '\alph{enumi}'.
+instance, '\alph{enumi}'. Note that the counter name does not start
+with a backslash.
'\alph'
prints COUNTER using lowercase letters: 'a', 'b', ...
@@ -3226,7 +4504,7 @@ instance, '\alph{enumi}'.
asterisk(*) dagger(U+2021) ddagger(U+2021)
section-sign(U+00A7) paragraph-sign(U+00B6) parallel(U+2225)
- double-asterisk(**) double-dagger(U+2021U+2021) double-ddagger(U+2021U+2021)
+ double-asterisk(**) double-dagger(U+2020U+2020) double-ddagger(U+2021U+2021)

File: latex2e.info, Node: \usecounter, Next: \value, Prev: \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol, Up: Counters
@@ -3238,9 +4516,24 @@ Synopsis:
\usecounter{COUNTER}
- The '\usecounter' command is used in the second argument of the
-'list' environment to specify COUNTER to be used to number the list
-items.
+ In the 'list' environment, when used in the second argument, this
+command sets up COUNTER to number the list items. It initializes
+COUNTER to zero, and arranges that when '\item' is called without its
+optional argument then COUNTER is incremented by '\refstepcounter',
+making its value be the current 'ref' value. This command is fragile
+(*note \protect::).
+
+ Put in the preamble, this makes a new list environment enumerated
+with TESTCOUNTER:
+
+ \newcounter{testcounter}
+ \newenvironment{test}{%
+ \begin{list}{}{%
+ \usecounter{testcounter}
+ }
+ }{%
+ \end{list}
+ }

File: latex2e.info, Node: \value, Next: \setcounter, Prev: \usecounter, Up: Counters
@@ -3252,11 +4545,26 @@ Synopsis:
\value{COUNTER}
- The '\value' command produces the value of COUNTER. It can be used
-anywhere LaTeX expects a number, for example:
+ This command expands to the value of COUNTER. It is often used in
+'\setcounter' or '\addtocounter', but '\value' can be used anywhere that
+LaTeX expects a number. It must not be preceded by '\protect' (*note
+\protect::).
+
+ The '\value' command is not used for typesetting the value of the
+counter. *Note \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol::.
- \setcounter{myctr}{3}
- \addtocounter{myctr}{1}
+ This example outputs 'Test counter is 6. Other counter is 5.'.
+
+ \newcounter{test} \setcounter{test}{5}
+ \newcounter{other} \setcounter{other}{\value{test}}
+ \addtocounter{test}{1}
+
+ Test counter is \arabic{test}.
+ Other counter is \arabic{other}.
+
+ This example inserts '\hspace{4\parindent}'.
+
+ \setcounter{myctr}{3} \addtocounter{myctr}{1}
\hspace{\value{myctr}\parindent}

@@ -3269,8 +4577,9 @@ Synopsis:
\setcounter{COUNTER}{VALUE}
- The '\setcounter' command sets the value of COUNTER to the VALUE
-argument.
+ The '\setcounter' command globally sets the value of COUNTER to the
+VALUE argument. Note that the counter name does not start with a
+backslash.

File: latex2e.info, Node: \addtocounter, Next: \refstepcounter, Prev: \setcounter, Up: Counters
@@ -3278,8 +4587,8 @@ File: latex2e.info, Node: \addtocounter, Next: \refstepcounter, Prev: \setcou
13.5 '\addtocounter{COUNTER}{VALUE}'
====================================
-The '\addtocounter' command increments COUNTER by the amount specified
-by the VALUE argument, which may be negative.
+The '\addtocounter' command globally increments COUNTER by the amount
+specified by the VALUE argument, which may be negative.

File: latex2e.info, Node: \refstepcounter, Next: \stepcounter, Prev: \addtocounter, Up: Counters
@@ -3288,8 +4597,15 @@ File: latex2e.info, Node: \refstepcounter, Next: \stepcounter, Prev: \addtoco
===============================
The '\refstepcounter' command works in the same way as '\stepcounter'
-*Note \stepcounter::, except it also defines the current '\ref' value to
-be the result of '\thecounter'.
+(*note \stepcounter::): it globally increments the value of COUNTER by
+one and resets the value of any counter numbered within it. (For the
+definition of "counters numbered within", *note \newcounter::.)
+
+ In addition, this command also defines the current '\ref' value to be
+the result of '\thecounter'.
+
+ While the counter value is set globally, the '\ref' value is set
+locally, i.e., inside the current group.

File: latex2e.info, Node: \stepcounter, Next: \day \month \year, Prev: \refstepcounter, Up: Counters
@@ -3297,8 +4613,9 @@ File: latex2e.info, Node: \stepcounter, Next: \day \month \year, Prev: \refst
13.7 '\stepcounter{COUNTER}'
============================
-The '\stepcounter' command adds one to COUNTER and resets all subsidiary
-counters.
+The '\stepcounter' command globally adds one to COUNTER and resets all
+counters numbered within it. (For the definition of "counters numbered
+within", *note \newcounter::.)

File: latex2e.info, Node: \day \month \year, Prev: \stepcounter, Up: Counters
@@ -3320,11 +4637,33 @@ File: latex2e.info, Node: Lengths, Next: Making paragraphs, Prev: Counters,
14 Lengths
**********
-A 'length' is a measure of distance. Many LaTeX commands take a length
+A "length" is a measure of distance. Many LaTeX commands take a length
as an argument.
+ Lengths come in two types. A "rigid length" (what Plain TeX calls a
+"dimen") such as '10pt' cannot contain a 'plus' or 'minus' component. A
+"rubber length" (what Plain TeX calls a "skip") can contain those, as
+with '1cm plus0.05cm minus0.01cm'. These give the ability to stretch or
+shrink; the length in the prior sentence could appear in the output as
+long as 1.05 cm or as short as 0.99 cm, depending on what TeX's
+typesetting algorithm finds optimum.
+
+ The 'plus' or 'minus' component of a rubber length can contain a
+"fill" component, as in '1in plus2fill'. This gives the length infinite
+stretchability or shrinkability, so that the length in the prior
+sentence can be set by TeX to any distance greater than or equal to
+1 inch. TeX actually provides three infinite glue components 'fil',
+'fill', and 'filll', such that the later ones overcome the earlier ones,
+but only the middle value is ordinarily used. *Note \hfill::, *Note
+\vfill::.
+
+ Multiplying an entire rubber length by a number turns it into a rigid
+length, so that after '\setlength{\ylength}{1in plus 0.2in}' and
+'\setlength{\zlength}{3\ylength}' then the value of '\zlength' is '3in'.
+
* Menu:
+* Units of length:: The units that LaTeX knows.
* \setlength:: Set the value of a length.
* \addtolength:: Add a quantity to a length.
* \settodepth:: Set a length to the depth of something.
@@ -3333,9 +4672,62 @@ as an argument.
* Predefined lengths:: Lengths that are, like, predefined.

-File: latex2e.info, Node: \setlength, Next: \addtolength, Up: Lengths
+File: latex2e.info, Node: Units of length, Next: \setlength, Up: Lengths
+
+14.1 Units of length
+====================
+
+TeX and LaTeX know about these units both inside and outside of math
+mode.
+
+'pt'
+ Point 1/72.27 inch. The conversion to metric units, to two decimal
+ places, is 1point = 2.85mm = 28.45cm.
+
+'pc'
+ Pica, 12 pt
+
+'in'
+ Inch, 72.27 pt
+
+'bp'
+ Big point, 1/72 inch. This length is the definition of a point in
+ PostScript and many desktop publishing systems.
+
+'cm'
+ Centimeter
+
+'mm'
+ Millimeter
+
+'dd'
+ Didot point, 1.07 pt
+
+'cc'
+ Cicero, 12 dd
+
+'sp'
+ Scaled point, 1/65536 pt
+
+ Two other lengths that are often used are values set by the designer
+of the font. The x-height of the current font "ex", traditionally the
+height of the lower case letter x, is often used for vertical lengths.
+Similarly "em", traditionally the width of the capital letter M, is
+often used for horizontal lengths (there is also '\enspace', which is
+'0.5em'). Use of these can help make a definition work better across
+font changes. For example, a definition of the vertical space between
+list items given as '\setlength{\itemsep}{1ex plus 0.05ex minus 0.01ex}'
+is more likely to still be reasonable if the font is changed than a
+definition given in points.
+
+ In math mode, many definitions are expressed in terms of the math
+unit "mu" given by 1 em = 18 mu, where the em is taken from the current
+math symbols family. *Note Spacing in math mode::.
+
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \setlength, Next: \addtolength, Prev: Units of length, Up: Lengths
-14.1 '\setlength{\LEN}{VALUE}'
+14.2 '\setlength{\LEN}{VALUE}'
==============================
The '\setlength' sets the value of \LEN to the VALUE argument, which can
@@ -3345,8 +4737,8 @@ millimeters ('mm'), points ('pt'), big points ('bp', etc.

File: latex2e.info, Node: \addtolength, Next: \settodepth, Prev: \setlength, Up: Lengths
-14.2 \addtolength{\LEN}{AMOUNT}
-===============================
+14.3 '\addtolength{\LEN}{AMOUNT}'
+=================================
The '\addtolength' command increments a "length command" \LEN by the
amount specified in the AMOUNT argument, which may be negative.
@@ -3354,7 +4746,7 @@ amount specified in the AMOUNT argument, which may be negative.

File: latex2e.info, Node: \settodepth, Next: \settoheight, Prev: \addtolength, Up: Lengths
-14.3 '\settodepth'
+14.4 '\settodepth'
==================
'\settodepth{\gnat}{text}'
@@ -3365,7 +4757,7 @@ to the depth of the 'text' argument.

File: latex2e.info, Node: \settoheight, Next: \settowidth, Prev: \settodepth, Up: Lengths
-14.4 '\settoheight'
+14.5 '\settoheight'
===================
'\settoheight{\gnat}{text}'
@@ -3376,7 +4768,7 @@ to the height of the 'text' argument.

File: latex2e.info, Node: \settowidth, Next: Predefined lengths, Prev: \settoheight, Up: Lengths
-14.5 '\settowidth{\LEN}{TEXT}'
+14.6 '\settowidth{\LEN}{TEXT}'
==============================
The '\settowidth' command sets the value of the command \LEN to the
@@ -3385,7 +4777,7 @@ width of the TEXT argument.

File: latex2e.info, Node: Predefined lengths, Prev: \settowidth, Up: Lengths
-14.6 Predefined lengths
+14.7 Predefined lengths
=======================
'\width'
@@ -3428,9 +4820,9 @@ File: latex2e.info, Node: \indent, Next: \noindent, Up: Making paragraphs
15.1 '\indent'
==============
-'\indent' produces a horizontal space whose width equals the width of
-the '\parindent' length, the normal paragraph indentation. It is used
-to add paragraph indentation where it would otherwise be suppressed.
+'\indent' produces a horizontal space whose width equals to the
+'\parindent' length, the normal paragraph indentation. It is used to
+add paragraph indentation where it would otherwise be suppressed.
The default value for '\parindent' is '1em' in two-column mode,
otherwise '15pt' for '10pt' documents, '17pt' for '11pt', and '1.5em'
@@ -3442,9 +4834,17 @@ File: latex2e.info, Node: \noindent, Next: \parskip, Prev: \indent, Up: Maki
15.2 '\noindent'
================
-When used at the beginning of the paragraph, '\noindent' suppresses any
-paragraph indentation. It has no effect when used in the middle of a
-paragraph.
+When used at the beginning of the paragraph, this command suppresses any
+paragraph indentation, as in this example.
+
+ .. end of the prior paragraph.
+
+ \noindent This paragraph is not indented.
+
+ It has no effect when used in the middle of a paragraph.
+
+ To eliminate paragraph indentation in an entire document, put
+'\setlength{\parindent}{0pt}' in the preamble.

File: latex2e.info, Node: \parskip, Next: Marginal notes, Prev: \noindent, Up: Making paragraphs
@@ -3472,9 +4872,12 @@ where the '\marginpar' occurs.
When you only specify the mandatory argument RIGHT, the text will be
placed
- * in the right margin for one-sided layout;
- * in the outside margin for two-sided layout;
- * in the nearest margin for two-column layout.
+ * in the right margin for one-sided layout (option 'oneside', see
+ *note Document class options::);
+ * in the outside margin for two-sided layout (option 'twoside', see
+ *note Document class options::);
+ * in the nearest margin for two-column layout (option 'twocolumn',
+ see *note Document class options::).
The command '\reversemarginpar' places subsequent marginal notes in
the opposite (inside) margin. '\normalmarginpar' places them in the
@@ -3541,7 +4944,8 @@ is used _outside_ of math mode.
The '\displaystyle' declaration forces the size and style of the
formula to be that of 'displaymath', e.g., with limits above and below
-summations. For example
+summations. For example:
+
$\displaystyle \sum_{n=0}^\infty x_n $
* Menu:
@@ -3559,11 +4963,35 @@ File: latex2e.info, Node: Subscripts & superscripts, Next: Math symbols, Up:
16.1 Subscripts & superscripts
==============================
-To get an expression exp to appear as a subscript, you just type
-'_{'exp'}'. To get exp to appear as a superscript, you type '^{'exp'}'.
-LaTeX handles superscripted superscripts and all of that stuff in the
-natural way. It even does the right thing when something has both a
-subscript and a superscript.
+In math mode, use the caret character '^' to make the EXP appear as a
+superscript, ie. type '^{EXP}'. Similarly, in math mode,
+underscore '_{EXP}' makes a subscript out of EXP.
+
+ In this example the '0' and '1' appear as subscripts while the '2' is
+a superscript.
+
+ \( (x_0+x_1)^2 \)
+
+ To have more than one character in EXP use curly braces as in
+'e^{-2x}'.
+
+ LaTeX handles superscripts on superscripts, and all of that stuff, in
+the natural way, so expressions such as 'e^{x^2}' and 'x_{a_0}' will
+look right. It also does the right thing when something has both a
+subscript and a superscript. In this example the '0' appears at the
+bottom of the integral sign while the '10' appears at the top.
+
+ \int_0^{10} x^2 \,dx
+
+ You can put a superscript or subscript before a symbol with a
+construct such as '{}_t K^2' in math mode (the initial '{}' prevents the
+prefixed subscript from being attached to any prior symbols in the
+expression).
+
+ Outside of math mode, a construct like 'A
+test$_\textnormal{subscript}$' will produce a subscript typeset in text
+mode, not math mode. Note that there are packages specialized for
+writing Chemical formulas such as 'mhchem'.

File: latex2e.info, Node: Math symbols, Next: Math functions, Prev: Subscripts & superscripts, Up: Math formulas
@@ -3572,637 +5000,848 @@ File: latex2e.info, Node: Math symbols, Next: Math functions, Prev: Subscript
=================
LaTeX provides almost any mathematical symbol you're likely to need.
-The commands for generating them can be used only in math mode. For
-example, if you include '$\pi$' in your source, you will get the pi
-symbol (\pi) in your output.
+For example, if you include '$\pi$' in your source, you will get the pi
+symbol U+03C0.
+
+ Below is a list of commonly-available symbols. It is by no means an
+exhaustive list. Each symbol here is described with a short phrase, and
+its symbol class (which determines the spacing around it) is given in
+parenthesis. The commands for these symbols can be used only in math
+mode.
'\|'
- \|
+ U+2225 Parallel (relation). Synonym: '\parallel'.
'\aleph'
- \aleph
+ U+2135 Aleph, transfinite cardinal (ordinary).
'\alpha'
- \alpha
+ U+03B1 Lower case Greek letter alpha (ordinary).
'\amalg'
- \amalg (binary operation)
+ U+2A3F Disjoint union (binary)
'\angle'
- \angle
+ U+2220 Geometric angle (ordinary). Similar: less-than sign '<' and
+ angle bracket '\langle'.
'\approx'
- \approx (relation)
+ U+2248 Almost equal to (relation).
'\ast'
- \ast (binary operation)
+ U+2217 Asterisk operator, convolution, six-pointed (binary).
+ Synonym: '*', which is often a superscript or subscript, as in the
+ Kleene star. Similar: '\star', which is five-pointed, and is
+ sometimes used as a general binary operation, and sometimes
+ reserved for cross-correlation.
'\asymp'
- \asymp (relation)
+ U+224D Asymptomatically equivalent (relation).
'\backslash'
- \ (delimiter)
+ \ Backslash (ordinary). Similar: set minus '\setminus', and
+ '\textbackslash' for backslash outside of math mode.
'\beta'
- \beta
+ U+03B2 Lower case Greek letter beta (ordinary).
'\bigcap'
- \bigcap
+ U+22C2 Variable-sized, or n-ary, intersection (operator). Similar:
+ binary intersection '\cap'.
'\bigcirc'
- \bigcirc (binary operation)
+ U+26AA Circle, larger (binary). Similar: function
+ composition '\circ'.
'\bigcup'
- \bigcup
+ U+22C3 Variable-sized, or n-ary, union (operator). Similar: binary
+ union '\cup'.
'\bigodot'
- \bigodot
+ U+2A00 Variable-sized, or n-ary, circled dot operator (operator).
'\bigoplus'
- \bigoplus
+ U+2A01 Variable-sized, or n-ary, circled plus operator (operator).
'\bigotimes'
- \bigotimes
+ U+2A02 Variable-sized, or n-ary, circled times operator (operator).
'\bigtriangledown'
- \bigtriangledown (binary operation)
+ U+25BD Variable-sized, or n-ary, open triangle pointing down
+ (operator).
'\bigtriangleup'
- \bigtriangleup (binary operation)
+ U+25B3 Variable-sized, or n-ary, open triangle pointing up
+ (operator).
'\bigsqcup'
- \bigsqcup
+ U+2A06 Variable-sized, or n-ary, square union (operator).
'\biguplus'
- \biguplus
+ U+2A04 Variable-sized, or n-ary, union operator with a plus
+ (operator). (Note that the name has only one p.)
-'\bigcap'
- \bigvee
+'\bigvee'
+ U+22C1 Variable-sized, or n-ary, logical-and (operator).
'\bigwedge'
- \bigwedge
+ U+22C0 Variable-sized, or n-ary, logical-or (operator).
'\bot'
- \bot
+ U+22A5 Up tack, bottom, least element of a poset, or a
+ contradiction (ordinary). See also '\top'.
'\bowtie'
- \bowtie (relation)
+ U+22C8 Natural join of two relations (relation).
'\Box'
- (square open box symbol)
+ U+25A1 Modal operator for necessity; square open box (ordinary).
+ This is not available in Plain TeX. In LaTeX you need to load the
+ 'amssymb' package.
'\bullet'
- \bullet (binary operation)
+ U+2022 Bullet (binary). Similar: multiplication dot '\cdot'.
'\cap'
- \cap (binary operation)
+ U+2229 Intersection of two sets (binary). Similar: variable-sized
+ operator '\bigcap'.
'\cdot'
- \cdot (binary operation)
+ U+22C5 Multiplication (binary). Similar: Bullet dot '\bullet'.
'\chi'
- \chi
+ U+03C7 Lower case Greek chi (ordinary).
'\circ'
- \circ (binary operation)
+ U+2218 Function composition, ring operator (binary). Similar:
+ variable-sized operator '\bigcirc'.
'\clubsuit'
- \clubsuit
+ U+2663 Club card suit (ordinary).
+
+'\complement'
+ U+2201 Set complement, used as a superscript as in
+ '$S^\complement$' (ordinary). This is not available in Plain TeX.
+ In LaTeX you should load the 'amssymb' package. Also used:
+ '$S^{\mathsf{c}}$' or '$\bar{S}$'.
'\cong'
- \cong (relation)
+ U+2245 Congruent (relation).
'\coprod'
- \coprod
+ U+2210 Coproduct (operator).
'\cup'
- \cup (binary operation)
+ U+222A Union of two sets (binary). Similar: variable-sized
+ operator '\bigcup'.
'\dagger'
- \dagger (binary operation)
+ U+2020 Dagger relation (binary).
'\dashv'
- \dashv (relation)
+ U+22A3 Dash with vertical, reversed turnstile (relation). Similar:
+ turnstile '\vdash'.
'\ddagger'
- \dagger (binary operation)
+ U+2021 Double dagger relation (binary).
'\Delta'
- \Delta
+ U+0394 Greek upper case delta, used for increment (ordinary).
'\delta'
- \delta
+ U+03B4 Greek lower case delta (ordinary).
'\Diamond'
- bigger \diamond
+ U+25C7 Large diamond operator (ordinary). This is not available in
+ Plain TeX. In LaTeX you must load the 'amssymb' package.
'\diamond'
- \diamond (binary operation)
+ U+22C4 Diamond operator, or diamond bullet (binary). Similar:
+ large diamond '\Diamond', circle bullet '\bullet'.
'\diamondsuit'
- \diamondsuit
+ U+2662 Diamond card suit (ordinary).
'\div'
- \div (binary operation)
+ U+00F7 Division sign (binary).
'\doteq'
- \doteq (relation)
+ U+2250 Approaches the limit (relation). Similar: geometrically
+ equal to '\Doteq'.
'\downarrow'
- \downarrow (delimiter)
+ U+2193 Down arrow, converges (relation). Similar: double line down
+ arrow '\Downarrow'.
'\Downarrow'
- \Downarrow (delimiter)
+ U+21D3 Double line down arrow (relation). Similar: single line
+ down arrow '\downarrow'.
'\ell'
- \ell
+ U+2113 Lower-case cursive letter l (ordinary).
'\emptyset'
- \emptyset
+ U+2205 Empty set symbol (ordinary). Similar: reversed empty
+ set '\varnothing'.
'\epsilon'
- \epsilon
+ U+03F5 Lower case Greek-text letter (ordinary). More widely used
+ in mathematics is the curly epsilon '\varepsilon' U+03B5. Related:
+ the set membership relation '\in' U+2208.
'\equiv'
- \equiv (relation)
+ U+2261 Equivalence (relation).
'\eta'
- \eta
+ U+03B7 Lower case Greek letter (ordinary).
'\exists'
- \exists
+ U+2203 Existential quantifier (ordinary).
'\flat'
- \flat
+ U+266D Musical flat (ordinary).
'\forall'
- \forall
+ U+2200 Universal quantifier (ordinary).
'\frown'
- \frown (relation)
+ U+2322 Downward curving arc (ordinary).
'\Gamma'
- \Gamma
+ U+0393 Upper case Greek letter (ordinary).
'\gamma'
- \gamma
+ U+03B3 Lower case Greek letter (ordinary).
'\ge'
- \ge
+ U+2265 Greater than or equal to (relation). This is a synonym
+ for '\geq'.
'\geq'
- \geq (relation)
+ U+2265 Greater than or equal to (relation). This is a synonym
+ for '\ge'.
'\gets'
- \gets
+ U+2190 Is assigned the value (relation). Synonym: '\leftarrow'.
'\gg'
- \gg (relation)
+ U+226B Much greater than (relation). Similar: much less
+ than '\ll'.
'\hbar'
- \hbar
+ U+210F Planck constant over two pi (ordinary).
'\heartsuit'
- \heartsuit
+ U+2661 Heart card suit (ordinary).
'\hookleftarrow'
- \hookleftarrow
+ U+21A9 Hooked left arrow (relation).
'\hookrightarrow'
- \hookrightarrow
+ U+21AA Hooked right arrow (relation).
'\iff'
- \iff
+ U+27F7 If and only if (relation). It is '\Longleftrightarrow' with
+ a '\thickmuskip' on either side.
'\Im'
- \Im
+ U+2111 Imaginary part (ordinary). See: real part '\Re'.
'\in'
- \in (relation)
+ U+2208 Set element (relation). See also: lower case Greek letter
+ epsilon '\epsilon'U+03F5 and rounded small epsilon '\varepsilon'.
'\infty'
- \infty
+ U+221E Infinity (ordinary).
'\int'
- \int
+ U+222B Integral (operator).
'\iota'
- \iota
+ U+03B9 Lower case Greek letter (ordinary).
'\Join'
- condensed bowtie symbol (relation)
+ U+2A1D Condensed bowtie symbol (relation). Not available in Plain
+ TeX.
'\kappa'
- \kappa
+ U+03BA Lower case Greek letter (ordinary).
'\Lambda'
- \Lambda
+ U+039B Upper case Greek letter (ordinary).
'\lambda'
- \lambda
+ U+03BB Lower case Greek letter (ordinary).
'\land'
- \land
+ U+2227 Logical and (binary). This is a synonym for '\wedge'. See
+ also logical or '\lor'.
'\langle'
- \langle (delimiter)
+ U+27E8 Left angle, or sequence, bracket (opening). Similar:
+ less-than '<'. Matches '\rangle'.
'\lbrace'
- \lbrace (delimiter)
+ U+007B Left curly brace (opening). Synonym: '\{'.
+ Matches '\rbrace'.
'\lbrack'
- \lbrack (delimiter)
+ U+005B Left square bracket (opening). Synonym: '['.
+ Matches '\rbrack'.
'\lceil'
- \lceil (delimiter)
+ U+2308 Left ceiling bracket, like a square bracket but with the
+ bottom shaved off (opening). Matches '\rceil'.
'\le'
- \le
+ U+2264 Less than or equal to (relation). This is a synonym
+ for '\leq'.
'\leadsto'
+ U+21DD Squiggly right arrow (relation). This is not available in
+ Plain TeX. In LaTeX you should load the 'amssymb' package. To get
+ this symbol outside of math mode you can put
+ '\newcommand*{\Leadsto}{\ensuremath{\leadsto}}' in the preamble and
+ then use '\Leadsto' instead.
'\Leftarrow'
- \Leftarrow
+ U+21D0 Is implied by, double-line left arrow (relation). Similar:
+ single-line left arrow '\leftarrow'.
'\leftarrow'
- \leftarrow
+ U+2190 Single-line left arrow (relation). Synonym: '\gets'.
+ Similar: double-line left arrow '\Leftarrow'.
'\leftharpoondown'
- \leftharpoondown
+ U+21BD Single-line left harpoon, barb under bar (relation).
'\leftharpoonup'
- \leftharpoonup
+ U+21BC Single-line left harpoon, barb over bar (relation).
'\Leftrightarrow'
- \Leftrightarrow
+ U+21D4 Bi-implication; double-line double-headed arrow (relation).
+ Similar: single-line double headed arrow '\leftrightarrow'.
'\leftrightarrow'
- \leftrightarrow
+ U+2194 Single-line double-headed arrow (relation). Similar:
+ double-line double headed arrow '\Leftrightarrow'.
'\leq'
- \leq (relation)
+ U+2264 Less than or equal to (relation). This is a synonym
+ for '\le'.
'\lfloor'
- \lfloor (delimiter)
+ U+230A Left floor bracket (opening).
'\lhd'
- (left-pointing arrow head)
+ U+25C1 Arrowhead, that is, triangle, pointing left (binary). This
+ is not available in Plain TeX. In LaTeX you should load the
+ 'amssymb' package. For the normal subgroup symbol you should load
+ 'amssymb' and use '\vartriangleleft' (which is a relation and so
+ gives better spacing).
'\ll'
- \ll (relation)
+ U+226A Much less than (relation). Similar: much greater
+ than '\gg'.
'\lnot'
- \lnot
+ U+00AC Logical negation (ordinary). Synonym: '\neg'.
'\longleftarrow'
- \longleftarrow
+ U+27F5 Long single-line left arrow (relation). Similar: long
+ double-line left arrow '\Longleftarrow'.
'\longleftrightarrow'
- \longleftrightarrow
+ U+27F7 Long single-line double-headed arrow (relation). Similar:
+ long double-line double-headed arrow '\Longleftrightarrow'.
'\longmapsto'
- \longmapsto
+ U+27FC Long single-line left arrow starting with vertical bar
+ (relation). Similar: shorter version '\mapsto'.
'\longrightarrow'
- \longrightarrow
+ U+27F6 Long single-line right arrow (relation). Similar: long
+ double-line right arrow '\Longrightarrow'.
'\lor'
- \lor
+ U+2228 Logical or (binary). Synonym: wedge '\wedge'.
'\mapsto'
- \mapsto
+ U+21A6 Single-line left arrow starting with vertical bar
+ (relation). Similar: longer version '\longmapsto'.
'\mho'
+ U+2127 Conductance, half-circle rotated capital omega (ordinary).
+ This is not available in Plain TeX. In LaTeX you should load the
+ 'amssymb' package.
'\mid'
- \mid (relation)
+ U+2223 Single-line vertical bar (relation). A typical use of
+ '\mid' is for a set '\{\, x \mid x\geq 5 \,\}'.
+
+ Similar: '\vert' and '|' produce the same single-line vertical bar
+ symbol but without any spacing (they fall in class ordinary) and
+ you should not use them as relations but instead only as ordinals,
+ i.e., footnote symbols. For absolute value, see the entry
+ for '\vert' and for norm see the entry for '\Vert'.
'\models'
- \models (relation)
+ U+22A8 Entails, or satisfies; double turnstile, short double dash
+ (relation). Similar: long double dash '\vDash'.
'\mp'
- \mp (binary operation)
+ U+2213 Minus or plus (relation).
'\mu'
- \mu
+ U+03BC Lower case Greek letter (ordinary).
'\nabla'
- \nabla
+ U+2207 Hamilton's del, or differential, operator (ordinary).
'\natural'
- \natural
+ U+266E Musical natural notation (ordinary).
'\ne'
- \ne
+ U+2260 Not equal (relation). Synonym: '\neq'.
'\nearrow'
- \nearrow
+ U+2197 North-east arrow (relation).
'\neg'
- \neg
+ U+00AC Logical negation (ordinary). Synonym: '\lnot'. Sometimes
+ instead used for negation: '\sim'.
'\neq'
- \neq (relation)
+ U+2260 Not equal (relation). Synonym: '\ne'.
'\ni'
- \ni (relation)
+ U+220B Reflected membership epsilon; has the member (relation).
+ Synonym: '\owns'. Similar: is a member of '\in'.
'\not'
- Overstrike a following operator with a /, as in \not=.
+ U+0020U+00A0U+0338 Long solidus, or slash, used to overstrike a
+ following operator (relation).
+
+ Many negated operators that don't require '\not' are available,
+ particularly with the 'amssymb' package. For example, '\notin' is
+ probably typographically preferable to '\not\in'.
'\notin'
- \ni
+ U+2209 Not an element of (relation). Similar: not subset
+ of '\nsubseteq'.
'\nu'
- \nu
+ U+03BD Lower case Greek letter (ordinary).
'\nwarrow'
- \nwarrow
+ U+2196 North-west arrow (relation).
'\odot'
- \odot (binary operation)
+ U+2299 Dot inside a circle (binary). Similar: variable-sized
+ operator '\bigodot'.
'\oint'
- \oint
+ U+222E Contour integral, integral with circle in the middle
+ (operator).
'\Omega'
- \Omega
+ U+03A9 Upper case Greek letter (ordinary).
'\omega'
- \omega
+ U+03C9 Lower case Greek letter (ordinary).
'\ominus'
- \ominus (binary operation)
+ U+2296 Minus sign, or dash, inside a circle (binary).
'\oplus'
- \oplus (binary operation)
+ U+2295 Plus sign inside a circle (binary). Similar: variable-sized
+ operator '\bigoplus'.
'\oslash'
- \oslash (binary operation)
+ U+2298 Solidus, or slash, inside a circle (binary).
'\otimes'
- \otimes (binary operation)
+ U+2297 Times sign, or cross, inside a circle (binary). Similar:
+ variable-sized operator '\bigotimes'.
'\owns'
- \owns
+ U+220B Reflected membership epsilon; has the member (relation).
+ Synonym: '\ni'. Similar: is a member of '\in'.
'\parallel'
- \parallel (relation)
+ U+2225 Parallel (relation). Synonym: '\|'.
'\partial'
- \partial
+ U+2202 Partial differential (ordinary).
'\perp'
- \perp (relation)
+ U+27C2 Perpendicular (relation). Similar: '\bot' uses the same
+ glyph but the spacing is different because it is in the class
+ ordinary.
'\phi'
- \phi
+ U+03D5 Lower case Greek letter (ordinary). The variant form is
+ '\varphi' U+03C6.
'\Pi'
- \Pi
+ U+03A0 Upper case Greek letter (ordinary).
'\pi'
- \pi
+ U+03C0 Lower case Greek letter (ordinary). The variant form is
+ '\varpi' U+03D6.
'\pm'
- \pm (binary operation)
+ U+00B1 Plus or minus (binary).
'\prec'
- \prec (relation)
+ U+227A Preceeds (relation). Similar: less than '<'.
'\preceq'
- \preceq (relation)
+ U+2AAF Preceeds or equals (relation). Similar: less than or
+ equals '\leq'.
'\prime'
- \prime
+ U+2032 Prime, or minute in a time expression (ordinary). Typically
+ used as a superscript '$A^\prime$'. Note that '$f^\prime$' and
+ '$f'$' produce the same result. An advantage of the second is that
+ '$f'''$' produces the the desired symbol, that is, the same result
+ as '$f^{\prime\prime\prime}$', but uses somewhat less typing. Note
+ that you can only use '\prime' in math mode but you can type right
+ single quote ''' in text mode also, although it resuts in a
+ different look than in math mode.
'\prod'
- \prod
+ U+220F Product (operator).
'\propto'
- \propto (relation)
+ U+221D Is proportional to (relation)
'\Psi'
- \Psi
+ U+03A8 Upper case Greek letter (ordinary).
'\psi'
- \psi
+ U+03C8 Lower case Greek letter (ordinary).
'\rangle'
- \rangle (delimiter)
+ U+27B9 Right angle, or sequence, bracket (closing). Similar:
+ greater than '>'. Matches:'\langle'.
'\rbrace'
- \rbrace (delimiter)
+ U+007D Right curly brace (closing). Synonym: '\}'.
+ Matches '\lbrace'.
'\rbrack'
- \rbrack (delimiter)
+ U+005D Right square bracket (closing). Synonym: ']'.
+ Matches '\lbrack'.
'\rceil'
- \rceil (delimiter)
+ U+2309 Right ceiling bracket (closing). Matches '\lceil'.
'\Re'
- \Re
+ U+211C Real part, real numbers, cursive capital R (ordinary).
+ Related: double-line, or blackboard bold, R '\mathbb{R}'; to access
+ this, load the 'amsfonts' package.
+
+'\restriction'
+ U+21BE Restriction of a function (relation).
+ Synonym: '\upharpoonright'. Not available in Plain TeX. In LaTeX
+ you should load the 'amssymb' package.
'\rfloor'
- \rfloor
+ U+230B Right floor bracket, a right square bracket with the top cut
+ off (closing). Matches '\lfloor'.
'\rhd'
- (binary operation)
+ U+25C1 Arrowhead, that is, triangle, pointing right (binary). This
+ is not available in Plain TeX. In LaTeX you should load the
+ 'amssymb' package. For the normal subgroup symbol you should
+ instead load 'amssymb' and use '\vartriangleright' (which is a
+ relation and so gives better spacing).
'\rho'
- \rho
+ U+03C1 Lower case Greek letter (ordinary). The variant form is
+ '\varrho' U+03F1.
'\Rightarrow'
- \Rightarrow
+ U+21D2 Implies, right-pointing double line arrow (relation).
+ Similar: right single-line arrow '\rightarrow'.
'\rightarrow'
- \rightarrow
+ U+2192 Right-pointing single line arrow (relation).
+ Synonym: '\to'. Similar: right double line arrow '\Rightarrow'.
'\rightharpoondown'
- \rightharpoondown
+ U+21C1 Right-pointing harpoon with barb below the line (relation).
'\rightharpoonup'
- \rightharpoonup
+ U+21C0 Right-pointing harpoon with barb above the line (relation).
'\rightleftharpoons'
- \rightleftharpoons
+ U+21CC Right harpoon up above left harpoon down (relation).
'\searrow'
- \searrow
+ U+2198 Arrow pointing southeast (relation).
'\setminus'
- \setminus (binary operation)
+ U+29F5 Set difference, reverse solidus or slash, like \ (binary).
+ Similar: backslash '\backslash' and also '\textbackslash' outside
+ of math mode.
'\sharp'
- \sharp
+ U+266F Musical sharp (ordinary).
'\Sigma'
- \Sigma
+ U+03A3 Upper case Greek letter (ordinary).
'\sigma'
- \sigma
+ U+03C3 Lower case Greek letter (ordinary). The variant form is
+ '\varsigma' U+03C2.
'\sim'
- \sim (relation)
+ U+223C Similar, in a relation (relation).
'\simeq'
- \simeq (relation)
+ U+2243 Similar or equal to, in a relation (relation).
'\smallint'
- \smallint
+ U+222B Integral sign that does not change to a larger size in a
+ display (operator).
'\smile'
- \smile (relation)
+ U+2323 Upward curving arc (ordinary).
'\spadesuit'
- \spadesuit
+ U+2660 Spade card suit (ordinary).
'\sqcap'
- \sqcap (binary operation)
+ U+2293 Square intersection symbol (binary). Similar:
+ intersection 'cap'.
'\sqcup'
- \sqcup (binary operation)
+ U+2294 Square union symbol (binary). Similar: union 'cup'.
+ Related: variable-sized operator '\bigsqcup'.
'\sqsubset'
- (relation)
+ U+228F Square subset symbol (relation). Similar: subset '\subset'.
+ This is not available in Plain TeX. In LaTeX you should load the
+ 'amssymb' package.
'\sqsubseteq'
- \sqsubseteq (relation)
+ U+2291 Square subset or equal symbol (binary). Similar: subset or
+ equal to '\subseteq'.
'\sqsupset'
- (relation)
+ U+2290 Square superset symbol (relation). Similar:
+ superset '\supset'. This is not available in Plain TeX. In LaTeX
+ you should load the 'amssymb' package.
'\sqsupseteq'
- \sqsupseteq (relation)
+ U+2292 Square superset or equal symbol (binary). Similar: superset
+ or equal '\supseteq'.
'\star'
- \star (binary operation)
+ U+22C6 Five-pointed star, sometimes used as a general binary
+ operation but sometimes reserved for cross-correlation (binary).
+ Similar: the synonyms asterisk '*' and '\ast', which are
+ six-pointed, and more often appear as a superscript or subscript,
+ as with the Kleene star.
'\subset'
- \subset (relation)
+ U+2282 Subset (occasionally, is implied by) (relation).
'\subseteq'
- \subseteq (relation)
+ U+2286 Subset or equal to (relation).
'\succ'
- \succ (relation)
+ U+227B Comes after, succeeds (relation). Similar: is less
+ than '>'.
'\succeq'
- \succeq (relation)
+ U+2AB0 Succeeds or is equal to (relation). Similar: less than or
+ equal to '\leq'.
'\sum'
- \sum
+ U+2211 Summation (operator). Similar: Greek capital
+ sigma '\Sigma'.
'\supset'
- \supset (relation)
+ U+2283 Superset (relation).
'\supseteq'
- \supseteq (relation)
+ U+2287 Superset or equal to (relation).
'\surd'
- \surd
+ U+221A Radical symbol (ordinary). The LaTeX command '\sqrt{..}'
+ typesets the square root of the argument, with a bar that extends
+ to cover the argument.
'\swarrow'
- \swarrow
+ U+2199 Southwest-pointing arrow (relation).
'\tau'
- \tau
+ U+03C4 Lower case Greek letter (ordinary).
'\theta'
- \theta
+ U+03B8 Lower case Greek letter (ordinary). The variant form is
+ '\vartheta' U+03D1.
'\times'
- \times (binary operation)
+ U+00D7 Primary school multiplication sign (binary). See
+ also '\cdot'.
'\to'
- \to
+ U+2192 Right-pointing single line arrow (relation).
+ Synonym: '\rightarrow'.
'\top'
- \top
+ U+22A4 Top, greatest element of a poset (ordinary). See
+ also '\bot'.
'\triangle'
- \triangle
+ U+25B3 Triangle (ordinary).
'\triangleleft'
- \triangleleft (binary operation)
+ U+25C1 Not-filled triangle pointing left (binary).
+ Similar: '\lhd'. For the normal subgroup symbol you should load
+ 'amssymb' and use '\vartriangleleft' (which is a relation and so
+ gives better spacing).
'\triangleright'
- \triangleright (binary operation)
+ U+25B7 Not-filled triangle pointing right (binary). For the normal
+ subgroup symbol you should instead load 'amssymb' and
+ use '\vartriangleright' (which is a relation and so gives better
+ spacing).
'\unlhd'
- left-pointing arrowhead with line under (binary operation)
+ U+22B4 Left-pointing not-filled arrowhead, that is, triangle, with
+ a line under (binary). This is not available in Plain TeX. In
+ LaTeX you should load the 'amssymb' package. For the normal
+ subgroup symbol load 'amssymb' and use '\vartrianglelefteq' (which
+ is a relation and so gives better spacing).
'\unrhd'
- right-pointing arrowhead with line under (binary operation)
+ U+22B5 Right-pointing not-filled arrowhead, that is, triangle, with
+ a line under (binary). This is not available in Plain TeX. In
+ LaTeX you should load the 'amssymb' package. For the normal
+ subgroup symbol load 'amssymb' and use '\vartrianglerighteq' (which
+ is a relation and so gives better spacing).
'\Uparrow'
- \Uparrow (delimiter)
+ U+21D1 Double-line upward-pointing arrow (relation). Similar:
+ single-line up-pointing arrow '\uparrow'.
'\uparrow'
- \uparrow (delimiter)
+ U+2191 Single-line upward-pointing arrow, diverges (relation).
+ Similar: double-line up-pointing arrow '\Uparrow'.
'\Updownarrow'
- \Updownarrow (delimiter)
+ U+21D5 Double-line upward-and-downward-pointing arrow (relation).
+ Similar: single-line upward-and-downward-pointing
+ arrow '\updownarrow'.
'\updownarrow'
- \updownarrow (delimiter)
+ U+2195 Single-line upward-and-downward-pointing arrow (relation).
+ Similar: double-line upward-and-downward-pointing
+ arrow '\Updownarrow'.
+
+'\upharpoonright'
+ U+21BE Up harpoon, with barb on right side (relation).
+ Synonym: '\restriction'. Not available in Plain TeX. In LaTeX you
+ should load the 'amssymb' package.
'\uplus'
- \uplus (binary operation)
+ U+228E Multiset union, a union symbol with a plus symbol in the
+ middle (binary). Similar: union '\cup'. Related: variable-sized
+ operator '\biguplus'.
'\Upsilon'
- \Upsilon
+ U+03A5 Upper case Greek letter (ordinary).
'\upsilon'
- \upsilon
+ U+03C5 Lower case Greek letter (ordinary).
'\varepsilon'
- \varepsilon
+ U+03B5 Rounded small epsilon (ordinary). This is more widely used
+ in mathematics than the non-variant lower case Greek-text letter
+ form '\epsilon' U+03F5. Related: set membership '\in'.
'\varphi'
- \varphi
+ U+03C6 Variant on the lower case Greek letter (ordinary). The
+ non-variant form is '\phi' U+03D5.
'\varpi'
- \varpi
+ U+03D6 Variant on the lower case Greek letter (ordinary). The
+ non-variant form is '\pi' U+03C0.
'\varrho'
- \varrho
+ U+03F1 Variant on the lower case Greek letter (ordinary). The
+ non-variant form is '\rho' U+03C1.
'\varsigma'
- \varsigma
+ U+03C2 Variant on the lower case Greek letter (ordinary). The
+ non-variant form is '\sigma' U+03C3.
'\vartheta'
- \vartheta
+ U+03D1 Variant on the lower case Greek letter (ordinary). The
+ non-variant form is '\theta' U+03B8.
'\vdash'
- \vdash (relation)
+ U+22A2 Provable; turnstile, vertical and a dash (relation).
+ Similar: turnstile rotated a half-circle '\dashv'.
'\vee'
- \vee (binary operation)
+ U+2228 Logical or; a downwards v shape (binary). Related: logical
+ and '\wedge'. Similar: variable-sized operator '\bigvee'.
'\Vert'
- \Vert (delimiter)
+ U+2016 Vertical double bar (ordinary). Similar: vertical single
+ bar '\vert'.
+
+ For a norm you can use the 'mathtools' package and add
+ '\DeclarePairedDelimiter\norm{\lVert}{\rVert}' to your preamble.
+ This gives you three command variants for double-line vertical bars
+ that are correctly horizontally spaced: if in the document body you
+ write the starred version '$\norm*{M^\perp}$' then the height of
+ the vertical bars will match the height of the argument, whereas
+ with '\norm{M^\perp}' the bars do not grow with the height of the
+ argument but instead are the default height, and '\norm[SIZE
+ COMMAND]{M^\perp}' also gives bars that do not grow but are set to
+ the size given in the SIZE COMMAND, e.g., '\Bigg'.
'\vert'
- \vert (delimiter)
+ U+007C Single line vertical bar (ordinary). Similar: double-line
+ vertical bar '\Vert'. For such that, as in the definition of a
+ set, use '\mid' because it is a relation.
+
+ For absolute value you can use the 'mathtools' package and add
+ '\DeclarePairedDelimiter\abs{\lvert}{\rvert}' to your preamble.
+ This gives you three command variants for single-line vertical bars
+ that are correctly horizontally spaced: if in the document body you
+ write the starred version '$\abs*{\frac{22}{7}}$' then the height
+ of the vertical bars will match the height of the argument, whereas
+ with '\abs{\frac{22}{7}}' the bars do not grow with the height of
+ the argument but instead are the default height, and '\abs[SIZE
+ COMMAND]{\frac{22}{7}}' also gives bars that do not grow but are
+ set to the size given in the SIZE COMMAND, e.g., '\Bigg'.
'\wedge'
- \wedge (binary operation)
+ U+2227 Logical and (binary). Synonym: '\land'. See also logical
+ or '\vee'. Similar: variable-sized operator '\bigwedge'.
'\wp'
- \wp
+ U+2118 Weierstrass p (ordinary).
'\wr'
- \wr (binary operation)
+ U+2240 Wreath product (binary).
'\Xi'
- \Xi
+ U+039E Upper case Greek letter (ordinary).
'\xi'
- \xi
+ U+03BE Lower case Greek letter (ordinary).
'\zeta'
- \zeta
+ U+03B6 Lower case Greek letter (ordinary).

File: latex2e.info, Node: Math functions, Next: Math accents, Prev: Math symbols, Up: Math formulas
@@ -4235,10 +5874,10 @@ spacing.
\cosh
'\cot'
- \cos
+ \cot
'\coth'
- \cosh
+ \coth
'\csc'
\csc
@@ -4247,7 +5886,7 @@ spacing.
\deg
'\det'
- \deg
+ \det
'\dim'
\dim
@@ -4367,7 +6006,7 @@ Accents::).
'\widehat'
Math wide hat accent: \widehat{x+y}.
-'\widehat'
+'\widetilde'
Math wide tilde accent: \widetilde{x+y}.

@@ -4376,20 +6015,45 @@ File: latex2e.info, Node: Spacing in math mode, Next: Math miscellany, Prev:
16.5 Spacing in math mode
=========================
-In a 'math' environment, LaTeX ignores the spaces you type and puts in
-the spacing according to the normal rules for mathematics texts. If you
-want different spacing, LaTeX provides the following commands for use in
-math mode:
+In a 'math' environment, LaTeX ignores the spaces that you use in the
+source, and instead puts in the spacing according to the normal rules
+for mathematics texts.
+
+ Many math mode spacing definitions are expressed in terms of the math
+unit "mu" given by 1 em = 18 mu, where the em is taken from the current
+math symbols family (*note Units of length::). LaTeX provides the
+following commands for use in math mode:
'\;'
- A thick space (5\over18\,quad).
+ Normally '5.0mu plus 5.0mu'. The longer name is '\thickspace'.
+ Math mode only.
+
'\:'
'\>'
- Both of these produce a medium space (2\over9\,quad).
+ Normally '4.0mu plus 2.0mu minus 4.0mu'. The longer name is
+ '\medspace'. Math mode only.
+
'\,'
- A thin space (1\over6\,quad); not restricted to math mode.
+ Normally '3mu'. The longer name is '\thinspace'. This can be used
+ in both math mode and text mode.
+
'\!'
- A negative thin space (-{1\over6}\,quad).
+ A negative thin space. Normally '-3mu'. Math mode only.
+
+'\quad'
+ This is 18mu, that is, 1em. This is often used for space
+ surrounding equations or expressions, for instance for the space
+ between two equations inside a 'displaymath' environment. It is
+ available in both text and math mode.
+
+'\qquad'
+ A length of 2 quads, that is, 36mu = 2em. It is available in both
+ text and math mode.
+
+ In this example a thinspace separates the function from the
+infinitesimal.
+
+ \int_0^1 f(x)\,dx

File: latex2e.info, Node: Math miscellany, Prev: Spacing in math mode, Up: Math formulas
@@ -4616,21 +6280,17 @@ File: latex2e.info, Node: Spaces, Next: Boxes, Prev: Page styles, Up: Top
LaTeX has many ways to produce white (or filled) space.
- Another space-producing command is '\,' to produce a "thin" space
-(usually 1/6quad). It can be used in text mode, but is more often
-useful in math mode (*note Spacing in math mode::).
-
* Menu:
Horizontal space
-* \hspace:: Fixed horizontal space.
-* \hfill:: Stretchable horizontal space.
-* \SPACE:: Normal interword space.
-* \@:: Ending a sentence.
-* \thinspace:: One-sixth of an em.
-* \/:: Insert italic correction.
-* \hrulefill:: Stretchable horizontal rule.
-* \dotfill:: Stretchable horizontal dots.
+* \hspace:: Fixed horizontal space.
+* \hfill:: Stretchable horizontal space.
+* \(SPACE) and \@:: Space after a period.
+* \(SPACE) after CS:: Controlling space gobbling after a control sequence.
+* \frenchspacing:: Make interword and intersentence space equal.
+* \thinspace:: One-sixth of an em.
+* \/:: Insert italic correction.
+* \hrulefill \dotfill:: Stretchable horizontal rule or dots.
Vertical space
* \addvspace:: Add arbitrary vertical space if needed.
@@ -4646,65 +6306,138 @@ File: latex2e.info, Node: \hspace, Next: \hfill, Up: Spaces
Synopsis:
- \hspace[*]{LENGTH}
+ \hspace{LENGTH}
+ \hspace*{LENGTH}
+
+ Add the horizontal space given by LENGTH. The LENGTH is a rubber
+length, that is, it may contain a 'plus' or 'minus' component, in any
+unit that LaTeX understands (*note Lengths::).
+
+ This command can add both positive and negative space; adding
+negative space is like backspacing.
+
+ Normally when TeX breaks a paragraph into lines it discards white
+space (glues and kerns) that would come at the start of a line, so you
+get an inter-word space or a line break between words but not both.
+This command's starred version '\hspace*{..}' puts a non-discardable
+invisible item in front of the space, so the space appears in the
+output.
- The '\hspace' command adds horizontal space. The LENGTH argument can
-be expressed in any terms that LaTeX understands: points, inches, etc.
-It is a rubber length. You can add both negative and positive space
-with an '\hspace' command; adding negative space is like backspacing.
+ This example make a one-line paragraph that puts 'Name:' an inch from
+the right margin.
- LaTeX normally removes horizontal space that comes at the beginning
-or end of a line. To preserve this space, use the optional '*' form.
+ \noindent\makebox[\linewidth]{\hspace{\fill}Name:\hspace{1in}}

-File: latex2e.info, Node: \hfill, Next: \SPACE, Prev: \hspace, Up: Spaces
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \hfill, Next: \(SPACE) and \@, Prev: \hspace, Up: Spaces
19.2 '\hfill'
=============
-The '\hfill' fill command produces a "rubber length" which has no
-natural space but can stretch or shrink horizontally as far as needed.
+Produce a rubber length which has no natural space but can stretch
+horizontally as far as needed (*note Lengths::).
- The '\fill' parameter is the rubber length itself (technically, the
-glue value '0pt plus1fill'); thus, '\hspace\fill' is equivalent to
-'\hfill'.
+ The command '\hfill' is equivalent to '\hspace{\fill}'. For space
+that does not disappear at line breaks use '\hspace*{\fill}' instead
+(*note \hspace::).

-File: latex2e.info, Node: \SPACE, Next: \@, Prev: \hfill, Up: Spaces
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \(SPACE) and \@, Next: \(SPACE) after CS, Prev: \hfill, Up: Spaces
-19.3 '\SPACE': Normal interword space
-=====================================
+19.3 '\(SPACE)' and \@
+======================
+
+Mark a punctuation character, typically a period, as either ending a
+sentence or as ending an abbreviation.
+
+ By default, in justifying a line LaTeX adjusts the space after a
+sentence-ending period (or a question mark, exclamation point, comma, or
+colon) more than the space between words (*note \frenchspacing::).
+LaTeX assumes that the period ends a sentence unless it is preceded by a
+capital letter, in which case it takes that period for part of an
+abbreviation. Note that if a sentence-ending period is immediately
+followed by a right parenthesis or bracket, or right single or double
+quote, then the intersentence space follows that parenthesis or quote.
+
+ If you have a period ending an abbreviation whose last letter is not
+a capital letter, and that abbreviation is not the last word in the
+sentence, then follow that period with a backslash-space ('\ ') or a tie
+('~'). Examples are 'Nat.\ Acad.\ Science', and 'Mr.~Bean', and
+'(manure, etc.)\ for sale'.
+
+ For other use of '\ ', see also *note \(SPACE) after CS::.
-The '\ ' (space) command produces a normal interword space. It's useful
-after punctuation which shouldn't end a sentence. For example, 'the
-article in Proc.\ Amer.\ Math\. Soc.\ is fundamental'. It is also often
-used after control sequences, as in '\TeX\ is a nice system.'
+ In the opposite situation, if you have a capital letter followed by a
+period that ends the sentence, then put '\@' on the left of that period.
+For example, 'book by the MAA\@.' will have intersentence spacing after
+the period.
- In normal circumstances, '\'<tab> and '\'<newline> are equivalent to
-'\ '.
+ In contrast, putting '\@' on the right of a period tells TeX that the
+period does not end the sentence. In the example 'reserved words (if,
+then, etc.\@) are different', TeX will put interword space after the
+closing parenthesis (note that '\@' is before the parenthesis).

-File: latex2e.info, Node: \@, Next: \thinspace, Prev: \SPACE, Up: Spaces
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \(SPACE) after CS, Next: \frenchspacing, Prev: \(SPACE) and \@, Up: Spaces
-19.4 '\@': Force sentence-ending punctuation
-============================================
+19.4 '\ ' after a control sequence
+==================================
+
+The '\ ' command is often used after control sequences to keep them from
+gobbling the space that follows, as in '\TeX\ is a nice system.' And,
+under normal circumstances '\'<tab> and '\'<newline> are equivalent to
+'\ '. For other use of '\ ', see also *note \(SPACE) and \@::.
-The '\@' command makes the following punctuation character end a
-sentence even if it normally would not. This is typically used after a
-capital letter. Here are side-by-side examples with and without '\@':
+ Some people prefer to use '{}' for the same purpose, as in '\TeX{} is
+a nice system.' This has the advantage that you can always write it the
+same way, like '\TeX{}', whether it is followed by a space or by a
+punctuation mark. Please compare:
- ... in C\@. Pascal, though ...
- ... in C. Pascal, though ...
+ \TeX\ is a nice system. \TeX, a nice system.
-produces
+ \TeX{} is a nice system. \TeX{}, a nice system.
- ... in C. Pascal, though ...
- ... in C. Pascal, though ...
+ When you define user commands (*note \newcommand & \renewcommand::)
+you can prevent the space gobbling after the command by using the
+package 'xspace' and inserting '\xspace' at the end of the definition
+For instance:
+ \documentclass{minimal}
+ \usepackage{xspace}
+ \newcommand*{\Loup}{Grand Cric\xspace}
+ \begin{document}
+ Que le \Loup me croque !
+ \end{document}
+
+ A quick hack to use '\xspace' for existing command is as follows:
+ \documentclass{minimal}
+ \usepackage{xspace}
+ \newcommand*{\SansXspaceTeX}{}
+ \let\SansXspaceTeX\TeX
+ \renewcommand{\TeX}{\SansXspaceTeX\xspace}
+ \begin{document}
+ \TeX is a nice system.
+ \end{document}

-File: latex2e.info, Node: \thinspace, Next: \/, Prev: \@, Up: Spaces
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \frenchspacing, Next: \thinspace, Prev: \(SPACE) after CS, Up: Spaces
+
+19.5 '\frenchspacing'
+=====================
+
+This declaration (from Plain TeX) causes LaTeX to treat intersentence
+spacing in the same way as interword spacing.
+
+ In justifying the text in a line, some typographic traditions,
+including English, prefer to adjust the space between sentences (or
+after other punctuation marks) more than the space between words.
+Following this declaration, all spaces are instead treated equally.
+
+ Revert to the default behavior by declaring '\nonfrenchspacing'.
-19.5 '\thinspace': Insert 1/6em
+
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \thinspace, Next: \/, Prev: \frenchspacing, Up: Spaces
+
+19.6 '\thinspace': Insert 1/6em
===============================
'\thinspace' produces an unbreakable and unstretchable space that is 1/6
@@ -4712,9 +6445,9 @@ of an em. This is the proper space to use between nested quotes, as in
'".

-File: latex2e.info, Node: \/, Next: \hrulefill, Prev: \thinspace, Up: Spaces
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \/, Next: \hrulefill \dotfill, Prev: \thinspace, Up: Spaces
-19.6 '\/': Insert italic correction
+19.7 '\/': Insert italic correction
===================================
The '\/' command produces an "italic correction". This is a small space
@@ -4740,37 +6473,55 @@ after the 'f') with pdfTeX.
done in a different way.

-File: latex2e.info, Node: \hrulefill, Next: \dotfill, Prev: \/, Up: Spaces
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \hrulefill \dotfill, Next: \addvspace, Prev: \/, Up: Spaces
-19.7 '\hrulefill'
-=================
+19.8 '\hrulefill \dotfill'
+==========================
-The '\hrulefill' fill command produces a "rubber length" which can
-stretch or shrink horizontally. It will be filled with a horizontal
-rule.
+Produce an infinite rubber length (*note Lengths::) filled with a
+horizontal rule (that is, a line) or with dots, instead of just white
+space.
-
-File: latex2e.info, Node: \dotfill, Next: \addvspace, Prev: \hrulefill, Up: Spaces
+ When placed between blank lines this example creates a paragraph that
+is left and right justified, where the space in the middle is filled
+with evenly spaced dots.
-19.8 '\dotfill'
-===============
+ \noindent Jack Aubrey\dotfill Melbury Lodge
-The '\dotfill' command produces a "rubber length" that fills with dots
-instead of just white space.
+ To make the rule or dots go to the line's end use '\null' at the
+start or end.
+
+ To change the rule's thickness, copy the definition and adjust it, as
+with '\renewcommand{\hrulefill}{\leavevmode\leaders\hrule height
+1pt\hfill\kern\z@}', which changes the default thickness of 0.4pt to
+1pt. Similarly, adjust the dot spacing as with
+'\renewcommand{\dotfill}{\leavevmode\cleaders\hb@xt@ 1.00em{\hss .\hss
+}\hfill\kern\z@}', which changes the default length of 0.33em to 1.00em.

-File: latex2e.info, Node: \addvspace, Next: \bigskip \medskip \smallskip, Prev: \dotfill, Up: Spaces
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \addvspace, Next: \bigskip \medskip \smallskip, Prev: \hrulefill \dotfill, Up: Spaces
19.9 '\addvspace'
=================
-'\addvspace{length}'
+'\addvspace{LENGTH}'
+
+ Add a vertical space of height LENGTH, which is a rubber length
+(*note Lengths::). However, if vertical space has already been added to
+the same point in the output by a previous '\addvspace' command then
+this command will not add more space than what is needed to make the
+natural length of the total vertical space equal to LENGTH.
+
+ Use this command to adjust the vertical space above or below an
+environment that starts a new paragraph. (For instance, a Theorem
+environment is defined to begin and end in '\addvspace{..}' so that two
+consecutive Theorem's are separated by one vertical space, not two.)
- The '\addvspace' command normally adds a vertical space of height
-length. However, if vertical space has already been added to the same
-point in the output by a previous '\addvspace' command, then this
-command will not add more space than is needed to make the natural
-length of the total vertical space equal to 'length'.
+ This command is fragile (*note \protect::).
+
+ The error 'Something's wrong--perhaps a missing \item' means that you
+were not in vertical mode when you invoked this command; one way to
+change that is to precede this command with a '\par' command.

File: latex2e.info, Node: \bigskip \medskip \smallskip, Next: \vfill, Prev: \addvspace, Up: Spaces
@@ -4802,26 +6553,56 @@ File: latex2e.info, Node: \vfill, Next: \vspace, Prev: \bigskip \medskip \sma
19.11 '\vfill'
==============
-The '\vfill' fill command produces a rubber length (glue) which can
-stretch or shrink vertically as far as needed. It's equivalent to
-'\vspace{\fill}' (*note \hfill::).
+End the current paragraph and insert a vertical rubber length (*note
+Lengths::) that is infinite, so it can stretch or shrink as far as
+needed.
+
+ It is often used in the same way as '\vspace{\fill}', except that
+'\vfill' ends the current paragraph, whereas '\vspace{\fill}' adds the
+infinite vertical space below its line irrespective of the paragraph
+structure. In both cases that space will disappear at a page boundary;
+to circumvent this see *note \vspace::.
+
+ In this example the page is filled, so the top and bottom lines
+contain the text 'Lost Dog!' and the third 'Lost Dog!' is exactly
+halfway between them.
+
+ \begin{document}
+ Lost Dog!
+ \vfill
+ Lost Dog!
+ \vfill
+ Lost Dog!
+ \end{document}

File: latex2e.info, Node: \vspace, Prev: \vfill, Up: Spaces
-19.12 '\vspace[*]{LENGTH}'
-==========================
+19.12 '\vspace{LENGTH}'
+=======================
-Synopsis:
+Synopsis, one of these two:
- \vspace[*]{LENGTH}
+ \vspace{LENGTH}
+ \vspace*{LENGTH}
- The '\vspace' command adds the vertical space LENGTH, i.e., a rubber
-length. LENGTH can be negative or positive.
+ Add the vertical space LENGTH. This can be negative or positive, and
+is a rubber length (*note Lengths::).
- Ordinarily, LaTeX removes vertical space added by '\vspace' at the
-top or bottom of a page. With the optional '*' argument, the space is
-not removed.
+ LaTeX removes the vertical space from '\vfill' at a page break, that
+is, at the top or bottom of a page. The starred version '\vspace*{..}'
+causes the space to stay.
+
+ In this example the two questions will be evenly spaced vertically on
+the page, with at least one inch of space below each.
+
+ \begin{document}
+ 1) Who put the bomp in the bomp bah bomp bah bomp?
+ \vspace{1in plus 1fill}
+
+ 2) Who put the ram in the rama lama ding dong?
+ \vspace{1in plus 1fill}
+ \end{document}

File: latex2e.info, Node: Boxes, Next: Special insertions, Prev: Spaces, Up: Top
@@ -4903,9 +6684,9 @@ Synopsis:
\makebox[WIDTH][POSITION]{TEXT}
The '\makebox' command creates a box just wide enough to contain the
-TEXT specified. The width of the box is specified by the optional WIDTH
-argument. The position of the text within the box is determined by the
-optional POSITION argument, which may take the following values:
+TEXT specified. The width of the box can be overridden by the optional
+WIDTH argument. The position of the text within the box is determined
+by the optional POSITION argument, which may take the following values:
'c'
Centered (default).
@@ -4917,8 +6698,8 @@ optional POSITION argument, which may take the following values:
Stretch (justify) across entire WIDTH; TEXT must contain
stretchable space for this to work.
- '\makebox' is also used within the picture environment *note \makebox
-(picture)::.
+ '\makebox' is also used within the 'picture' environment *note
+\makebox (picture)::.

File: latex2e.info, Node: \parbox, Next: \raisebox, Prev: \makebox, Up: Boxes
@@ -5193,7 +6974,7 @@ available in OT1; you may need to load the 'textcomp' package.
Em-dash: -- (for punctuation).
'\textendash (or '--')'
- En-dash: -- (for ranges).
+ En-dash: - (for ranges).
'\texteuro'
The Euro symbol: Euro.
@@ -5303,7 +7084,8 @@ capital letters. These are not available with OT1.
Produces a tilde accent over the following, as in n~.
'\b'
- Produces a bar accent under the following, as in o_.
+ Produces a bar accent under the following, as in o_. See also
+ '\underbar' hereinafter.
'\c'
'\capitalcedilla'
@@ -5348,7 +7130,8 @@ capital letters. These are not available with OT1.
Not exactly an accent, this produces a bar under the argument text.
The argument is always processed in horizontal mode. The bar is
always a fixed position under the baseline, thus crossing through
- descenders. See also '\underline' in *note Math miscellany::.
+ descenders. See also '\underline' in *note Math miscellany::. See
+ also '\b' above.
'\v'
'\capitalcaron'
@@ -5505,8 +7288,8 @@ comma-separated. Each FILE must exactly match a filename specified in a

File: latex2e.info, Node: \input, Prev: \includeonly, Up: Splitting the input
-22.3 \input
-===========
+22.3 '\input'
+=============
Synopsis:
@@ -5564,8 +7347,8 @@ of these lists from being generated.

File: latex2e.info, Node: \addcontentsline, Next: \addtocontents, Up: Tables of contents
-23.1.1 \addcontentsline
------------------------
+23.1.1 '\addcontentsline'
+-------------------------
The '\addcontentsline'{EXT}{UNIT}{TEXT} command adds an entry to the
specified list or table where:
@@ -5596,8 +7379,8 @@ ENTRY

File: latex2e.info, Node: \addtocontents, Prev: \addcontentsline, Up: Tables of contents
-23.1.2 \addtocontents
----------------------
+23.1.2 '\addtocontents'
+-----------------------
The '\addtocontents'{EXT}{TEXT} command adds text (or formatting
commands) directly to the '.EXT' file that generates the table of
@@ -5678,70 +7461,124 @@ File: latex2e.info, Node: Letters, Next: Terminal input/output, Prev: Front/b
24 Letters
**********
-You can use LaTeX to typeset letters, both personal and business. The
-'letter' document class is designed to make a number of letters at once,
-although you can make just one if you so desire.
+Synopsis:
- Your '.tex' source file has the same minimum commands as the other
-document classes, i.e., you must have the following commands as a
-minimum:
+ \documentclass{letter}
+ \address{SENDER ADDRESS}
+ \signature{SENDER NAME}
+ \begin{document}
+ \begin{letter}{RECIPIENT ADDRESS}
+ \opening{SALUTATION}
+ LETTER BODY
+ \closing{CLOSING TEXT}
+ \end{letter}
+ ... more letters ...
+ \end{document}
- \documentclass{letter}
- \begin{document}
- ... letters ...
- \end{document}
+ Produce one or more letters.
- Each letter is a 'letter' environment, whose argument is the name and
-address of the recipient. For example, you might have:
+ Each letter is in a separate 'letter' environment, whose argument
+RECIPIENT ADDRESS often contains multiple lines separated with a double
+backslash ('\\'). For example, you might have:
- \begin{letter}{Mr. Joe Smith\\ 2345 Princess St.
- \\ Edinburgh, EH1 1AA}
+ \begin{letter}{Mr. Joe Smith \\
+ 2345 Princess St. \\
+ Edinburgh, EH1 1AA}
...
\end{letter}
- The letter itself begins with the '\opening' command. The text of
-the letter follows. It is typed as ordinary LaTeX input. Commands that
-make no sense in a letter, like '\chapter', do not work. The letter
-closes with a '\closing' command.
-
- After the 'closing', you can have additional material. The '\cc'
-command produces the usual "cc: ...". There's also a similar '\encl'
-command for a list of enclosures. With both these commands, use '\\' to
-separate the items.
+ The start of the 'letter' environment resets the page number to 1,
+and the footnote number to 1 also.
+
+ The SENDER ADDRESS and SENDER NAME are common to all of the letters,
+whether there is one or more, so these are best put in the preamble. As
+with the recipient address, often SENDER ADDRESS contains multiple lines
+separated by a double backslash ('\\'). LaTeX will put the SENDER NAME
+under the closing, after a vertical space for the traditional
+hand-written signature; it also can contain multiple lines.
+
+ Each letter environment begins with a required '\opening' command
+such as '\opening{Dear Madam or Sir:}'. The LETTER BODY text is
+ordinary LaTeX so it can contain everything from from enumerated lists
+to displayed math, except that commands such as '\chapter' that make no
+sense in a letter are turned off. Each letter environment typically
+ends with a '\closing' command such as '\closing{Yours,}'.
+
+ Additional material may come after the '\closing'. You can say who
+is receiving a copy of the letter with a command like '\cc{the Boss \\
+the Boss's Boss}'. There's a similar '\encl' command for a list of
+enclosures. And, you can add a postscript with '\ps'.
+
+ LaTeX's default is to indent the signature and the '\closing' above
+it by a length of '\longindentation'. By default this is
+'0.5\textwidth'. To make them flush left, put
+'\setlength{\longindentation}{0em}' in your preamble.
+
+ To set a fixed date use something like
+'\renewcommand{\today}{2015-Oct-12}'. If put in your preamble then it
+will apply to all the letters.
+
+ This example shows only one 'letter' environment. The three lines
+marked as optional are typically omitted.
+
+ \documentclass{letter}
+ \address{Sender's street \\ Sender's town}
+ \signature{Sender's name \\ Sender's title}
+ % optional: \location{Mailbox 13}
+ % optional: \telephone{(102) 555-0101}
+ \begin{document}
+ \begin{letter}{Recipient's name \\ Recipient's address}
+ \opening{Sir:}
+ % optional: \thispagestyle{firstpage}
+ I am not interested in entering a business arrangement with you.
+ \closing{Your most humble, etc.,}
+ \end{letter}
+ \end{document}
These commands are used with the 'letter' class.
* Menu:
-* \address:: Your return address.
-* \cc:: Cc list.
-* \closing:: Saying goodbye.
-* \encl:: List of enclosed material.
-* \location:: Your organization's address.
-* \makelabels:: Making address labels.
-* \name:: Your name, for the return address.
-* \opening:: Saying hello.
-* \ps:: Adding a postscript.
-* \signature:: Your signature.
-* \startbreaks:: Allow page breaks.
-* \stopbreaks:: Disallow page breaks.
-* \telephone:: Your phone number.
+* \address:: Sender's return address.
+* \cc:: Carbon copy list.
+* \closing:: Saying goodbye.
+* \encl:: List of enclosed material.
+* \location:: Sender's organizational location.
+* \makelabels:: Make address labels.
+* \name:: Sender's name, for the return address.
+* \opening:: Saying hello.
+* \ps:: Adding a postscript.
+* \signature:: Sender's signature.
+* \telephone:: Sender's phone number.

File: latex2e.info, Node: \address, Next: \cc, Up: Letters
-24.1 \address{RETURN-ADDRESS}
-=============================
+24.1 '\address'
+===============
+
+Synopsis:
+
+ \address{SENDERS ADDRESS}
+
+ Specifies the return address as it appears on the letter and on the
+envelope. Separate multiple lines in SENDERS ADDRESS with a double
+backslash '\\'.
-The '\address' specifies the return address of a letter, as it should
-appear on the letter and the envelope. Separate lines of the address
-should be separated by '\\' commands.
+ Because it can apply to multiple letters this declaration is often
+put in the preamble. However, it can go anywhere, including inside an
+individual 'letter' environment.
- If you do not make an '\address' declaration, then the letter will be
-formatted for copying onto your organization's standard letterhead.
-(*Note Overview::, for details on your local implementation). If you
-give an '\address' declaration, then the letter will be formatted as a
-personal letter.
+ This command is optional: without the '\address' declaration the
+letter is formatted with some blank space on top, for copying onto
+pre-printed letterhead paper. (*Note Overview::, for details on your
+local implementation.) With the '\address' declaration, it is formatted
+as a personal letter.
+
+ Here is an example.
+
+ \address{Stephen Maturin \\
+ The Grapes of the Savoy}

File: latex2e.info, Node: \cc, Next: \closing, Prev: \address, Up: Letters
@@ -5751,10 +7588,15 @@ File: latex2e.info, Node: \cc, Next: \closing, Prev: \address, Up: Letters
Synopsis:
- \cc{NAME1\\NAME2}
+ \cc{FIRST NAME \\
+ .. }
+
+ Produce a list of names to which copies of the letter were sent.
+This command is optional. If it appears then typically it comes after
+'\closing'. Separate multiple lines with a double backslash '\\'.
- Produce a list of NAMEs the letter was copied to. Each name is
-printed on a separate line.
+ \cc{President \\
+ Vice President}

File: latex2e.info, Node: \closing, Next: \encl, Prev: \cc, Up: Letters
@@ -5766,8 +7608,10 @@ Synopsis:
\closing{text}
- A letter closes with a '\closing' command, for example,
- \closing{Best Regards,}
+ Usually at the end of a letter, above the handwritten signature,
+there is a '\closing' (although this command is optional). For example,
+
+ \closing{Regards,}

File: latex2e.info, Node: \encl, Next: \location, Prev: \closing, Up: Letters
@@ -5777,9 +7621,15 @@ File: latex2e.info, Node: \encl, Next: \location, Prev: \closing, Up: Letter
Synopsis:
- \encl{LINE1\\LINE2}
+ \encl{FIRST ENCLOSED OBJECT \\
+ .. }
+
+ Produce a list of things included with the letter. This command is
+optional; when it is used, it typically is put after '\closing'.
+Separate multiple lines with a double backslash '\\'.
- Declare a list of one more enclosures.
+ \encl{License \\
+ Passport }

File: latex2e.info, Node: \location, Next: \makelabels, Prev: \encl, Up: Letters
@@ -5787,10 +7637,12 @@ File: latex2e.info, Node: \location, Next: \makelabels, Prev: \encl, Up: Let
24.5 '\location'
================
-'\location{address}'
+Synopsis:
+
+ \location{TEXT}
- This modifies your organization's standard address. This only
-appears if the 'firstpage' pagestyle is selected.
+ The TEXT appears centered at the bottom of the each page. It only
+appears if the page style is 'firstpage'.

File: latex2e.info, Node: \makelabels, Next: \name, Prev: \location, Up: Letters
@@ -5798,10 +7650,24 @@ File: latex2e.info, Node: \makelabels, Next: \name, Prev: \location, Up: Let
24.6 '\makelabels'
==================
-'\makelabels{number}'
+Synopsis:
+
+ \makelabels
+
+ Create a sheet of address labels from the recipient addresses, one
+for each letter. This sheet will be output before the letters, with the
+idea that you can copy it to a sheet of peel-off labels. This command
+goes in the preamble.
- If you issue this command in the preamble, LaTeX will create a sheet
-of address labels. This sheet will be output before the letters.
+ Customize the labels by redefining the commands '\startlabels',
+'\mlabel', and '\returnaddress' in the preamble. The command
+'\startlabels' sets the width, height, number of columns, etc., of the
+page onto which the labels are printed. The command '\mlabel{SENDER
+ADDRESS}{RECIPIENT ADDRESS}' produces the two labels (or one, if you
+choose to ignore the SENDER ADDRESS). The SENDER ADDRESS is the value
+returned by the macro '\returnaddress' while RECIPIENT ADDRESS is the
+value passed in the argument to the 'letter' environment. By default
+'\mlabel' ignores the first argument, the SENDER ADDRESS.

File: latex2e.info, Node: \name, Next: \opening, Prev: \makelabels, Up: Letters
@@ -5809,25 +7675,28 @@ File: latex2e.info, Node: \name, Next: \opening, Prev: \makelabels, Up: Lett
24.7 '\name'
============
-'\name{June Davenport}'
+Synopsis:
+
+ \name{NAME}
- Your name, used for printing on the envelope together with the return
-address.
+ Sender's name, used for printing on the envelope together with the
+return address.

File: latex2e.info, Node: \opening, Next: \ps, Prev: \name, Up: Letters
-24.8 '\opening{TEXT}'
-=====================
+24.8 '\opening'
+===============
Synopsis:
\opening{TEXT}
- A letter begins with the '\opening' command. The mandatory argument,
-TEXT, is whatever text you wish to start your letter. For instance:
+ This command is required. It starts a letter, following the
+'\begin{letter}{..}'. The mandatory argument TEXT is the text that
+starts your letter. For instance:
- \opening{Dear Joe,}
+ \opening{Dear John:}

File: latex2e.info, Node: \ps, Next: \signature, Prev: \opening, Up: Letters
@@ -5835,48 +7704,61 @@ File: latex2e.info, Node: \ps, Next: \signature, Prev: \opening, Up: Letters
24.9 '\ps'
==========
-Use the '\ps' command to start a postscript in a letter, after
-'\closing'.
+Synopsis:
-
-File: latex2e.info, Node: \signature, Next: \startbreaks, Prev: \ps, Up: Letters
+ \ps{TEXT}
-24.10 '\signature{TEXT}'
-========================
+ Add a postscript. This command is optional and usually is used after
+'\closing'.
-Your name, as it should appear at the end of the letter underneath the
-space for your signature. '\\' starts a new line within TEXT as usual.
+ \ps{P.S. After you have read this letter, burn it. Or eat it.}

-File: latex2e.info, Node: \startbreaks, Next: \stopbreaks, Prev: \signature, Up: Letters
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \signature, Next: \telephone, Prev: \ps, Up: Letters
-24.11 '\startbreaks'
-====================
+24.10 '\signature'
+==================
+
+Synopsis:
-'\startbreaks'
+ \signature{FIRST LINE \\
+ .. }
- Used after a '\stopbreaks' command to allow page breaks again.
+ The sender's name. This command is optional, although its inclusion
+is usual.
-
-File: latex2e.info, Node: \stopbreaks, Next: \telephone, Prev: \startbreaks, Up: Letters
+ The argument text appears at the end of the letter, after the closing
+and after a vertical space for the traditional hand-written signature.
+Separate multiple lines with a double backslash '\\'. For example:
-24.12 '\stopbreaks'
-===================
+ \signature{J Fred Muggs \\
+ White House}
-'\stopbreaks'
+ LaTeX's default for the vertical space from the '\closing' text down
+to the '\signature' text is '6\medskipamount', which is six times 0.7em.
- Inhibit page breaks until a '\startbreaks' command occurs.
+ This command is usually in the preamble, to apply to all the letters
+in the document. To have it apply to one letter only, put it inside a
+'letter' environment and before the '\closing'.
+
+ You can include a graphic in the signature, for instance with
+'\signature{\vspace{-6\medskipamount}\includegraphics{sig.png}\\ My
+name}' (this requires writing '\usepackage{graphicx}' in the preamble).

-File: latex2e.info, Node: \telephone, Prev: \stopbreaks, Up: Letters
+File: latex2e.info, Node: \telephone, Prev: \signature, Up: Letters
-24.13 '\telephone'
+24.11 '\telephone'
==================
-'\telephone{number}'
+Synopsis:
+
+ \telephone{NUMBER}
- This is your telephone number. This only appears if the 'firstpage'
-pagestyle is selected.
+ The sender's telephone number. This is typically in the preamble,
+where it applies to all letters. This only appears if the 'firstpage'
+pagestyle is selected. If so, it appears on the lower right of the
+page.

File: latex2e.info, Node: Terminal input/output, Next: Command line, Prev: Letters, Up: Top
@@ -6113,11 +7995,7 @@ Concept Index
* Menu:
* '*' prompt: Command line. (line 18)
-* *-form of defining new commands: \newcommand & \renewcommand.
- (line 13)
-* *-form of environment commands: \newenvironment & \renewenvironment.
- (line 15)
-* *-form of sectioning commands: Sectioning. (line 31)
+* '*'-form of sectioning commands: Sectioning. (line 31)
* '.glo' file: Glossaries. (line 8)
* '.idx' file: Indexes. (line 9)
* '.ind' file: Indexes. (line 23)
@@ -6129,7 +8007,7 @@ Concept Index
* acute accent: Accents. (line 20)
* acute accent, math: Math accents. (line 11)
* additional packages, loading: Document class options.
- (line 75)
+ (line 95)
* ae ligature: Non-English characters.
(line 15)
* align environment, from 'amsmath': eqnarray. (line 6)
@@ -6146,6 +8024,7 @@ Concept Index
* ASCII circumflex, in text: Text symbols. (line 64)
* ASCII tilde, in text: Text symbols. (line 67)
* asterisk, centered, in text: Text symbols. (line 70)
+* at clause, in font definitions: \newfont. (line 23)
* author, for titlepage: \maketitle. (line 12)
* auxiliary file: Output files. (line 33)
* 'babel' package: Accents. (line 6)
@@ -6157,45 +8036,50 @@ Concept Index
* bar-under accent: Accents. (line 46)
* basics of LaTeX: Overview. (line 6)
* 'beamer' template and class: beamer template. (line 6)
+* beginning of document hook: \AtBeginDocument. (line 3)
* bibliography format, open: Document class options.
- (line 42)
+ (line 62)
* bibliography, creating (automatically): Using BibTeX. (line 6)
* bibliography, creating (manually): thebibliography. (line 6)
* bibTeX, using: Using BibTeX. (line 6)
* big circle symbols, in text: Text symbols. (line 82)
+* Big point: Units of length. (line 20)
* black boxes, omitting: Document class options.
- (line 28)
-* bold font: Font styles. (line 104)
-* bold math: Font styles. (line 84)
-* bold typewriter, avoiding: description. (line 18)
+ (line 48)
+* bold font: Font styles. (line 71)
+* bold math: Font styles. (line 130)
+* bold typewriter, avoiding: description. (line 23)
+* box, allocating new: \newsavebox. (line 6)
* boxes: Boxes. (line 6)
* brace, left, in text: Text symbols. (line 85)
* brace, right, in text: Text symbols. (line 88)
* breaking lines: Line breaking. (line 6)
* breaking pages: Page breaking. (line 6)
-* breve accent: Accents. (line 85)
+* breve accent: Accents. (line 86)
* breve accent, math: Math accents. (line 17)
* bug reporting: About this document. (line 6)
-* bullet symbol: Math symbols. (line 87)
+* bullet symbol: Math symbols. (line 110)
* bullet, in text: Text symbols. (line 91)
* bulleted lists: itemize. (line 6)
-* calligraphic letters for math: Font styles. (line 107)
+* calligraphic letters for math: Font styles. (line 74)
* cap height: Text symbols. (line 99)
-* caron accent: Accents. (line 95)
+* caron accent: Accents. (line 97)
* cc list, in letters: \cc. (line 6)
-* cedilla accent: Accents. (line 50)
+* cedilla accent: Accents. (line 51)
* centered asterisk, in text: Text symbols. (line 70)
* centered equations: Document class options.
- (line 32)
+ (line 52)
* centered period, in text: Text symbols. (line 138)
* centering text, declaration for: \centering. (line 6)
* centering text, environment for: center. (line 6)
+* Centimeter: Units of length. (line 24)
* characters, accented: Accents. (line 6)
* characters, non-English: Non-English characters.
(line 6)
* characters, reserved: Reserved characters. (line 6)
-* check accent: Accents. (line 95)
+* check accent: Accents. (line 97)
* check accent, math: Math accents. (line 20)
+* Cicero: Units of length. (line 33)
* circle symbol, big, in text: Text symbols. (line 82)
* circled letter, in text: Text symbols. (line 94)
* circumflex accent: Accents. (line 33)
@@ -6212,6 +8096,9 @@ Concept Index
(line 6)
* commands, defining new ones: \newcommand & \renewcommand.
(line 6)
+* commands, defining new ones <1>: \providecommand. (line 6)
+* commands, redefining: \newcommand & \renewcommand.
+ (line 6)
* composite word mark, in text: Text symbols. (line 99)
* computer programs, typesetting: verbatim. (line 6)
* contents file: Output files. (line 43)
@@ -6219,8 +8106,9 @@ Concept Index
* counters, a list of: Counters. (line 6)
* counters, defining new: \newcounter. (line 6)
* counters, getting value of: \value. (line 6)
+* counters, printing: \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol.
+ (line 6)
* counters, setting: \setcounter. (line 6)
-* creating letters: Letters. (line 6)
* creating pictures: picture. (line 6)
* creating tables: table. (line 6)
* credit footnote: \maketitle. (line 22)
@@ -6234,20 +8122,24 @@ Concept Index
* dagger, in text: Text symbols. (line 15)
* dagger, in text <1>: Text symbols. (line 104)
* date, for titlepage: \maketitle. (line 18)
+* date, today's: \today. (line 6)
* 'datetime' package: \today. (line 11)
* defining a new command: \newcommand & \renewcommand.
(line 6)
+* defining a new command <1>: \providecommand. (line 6)
* defining new environments: \newenvironment & \renewenvironment.
(line 6)
* defining new fonts: \newfont. (line 6)
* defining new theorems: \newtheorem. (line 6)
* definitions: Definitions. (line 6)
* description lists, creating: description. (line 6)
+* design size, in font definitions: \newfont. (line 23)
+* Didot point: Units of length. (line 30)
* dieresis accent: Accents. (line 16)
* discretionary multiplication: Math miscellany. (line 7)
-* displaying quoted text with paragraph indentation: quotation.
+* displaying quoted text with paragraph indentation: quotation and quote.
(line 6)
-* displaying quoted text without paragraph indentation: quote.
+* displaying quoted text without paragraph indentation: quotation and quote.
(line 6)
* document class options: Document class options.
(line 6)
@@ -6258,10 +8150,10 @@ Concept Index
* dot accent: Accents. (line 25)
* dot over accent, math: Math accents. (line 26)
* dot-over accent: Accents. (line 25)
-* dot-under accent: Accents. (line 54)
-* dotless i: Accents. (line 62)
+* dot-under accent: Accents. (line 55)
+* dotless i: Accents. (line 63)
* dotless i, math: Math accents. (line 35)
-* dotless j: Accents. (line 65)
+* dotless j: Accents. (line 66)
* dotless j, math: Math accents. (line 38)
* double angle quotation marks: Text symbols. (line 30)
* double dagger, in text: Text symbols. (line 18)
@@ -6273,51 +8165,62 @@ Concept Index
* double quote, straight base: Text symbols. (line 157)
* double right quote: Text symbols. (line 147)
* double spacing: Low-level font commands.
- (line 52)
+ (line 114)
* double vertical bar, in text: Text symbols. (line 79)
* e-dash: Text symbols. (line 116)
* e-TeX: TeX engines. (line 12)
* ellipsis: Text symbols. (line 36)
+* em: Units of length. (line 38)
* em-dash: Text symbols. (line 113)
* em-dash, three-quarters: Text symbols. (line 166)
* em-dash, two-thirds: Text symbols. (line 172)
-* emphasis: Font styles. (line 36)
-* emphasis <1>: Font styles. (line 110)
+* emphasis: Font styles. (line 59)
* enclosure list: \encl. (line 6)
-* ending & starting: Starting and ending. (line 6)
+* end of document hook: \AtEndDocument. (line 3)
+* ending and starting: Starting and ending. (line 6)
* engines, TeX: TeX engines. (line 6)
* enlarge current page: \enlargethispage. (line 6)
+* environment: Starting and ending. (line 22)
+* environment, theorem-like: \newtheorem. (line 6)
* environments: Environments. (line 6)
* environments, defining: \newenvironment & \renewenvironment.
(line 6)
* equation number, cross referencing: \ref. (line 6)
* equation numbers, left vs. right: Document class options.
- (line 38)
-* equation numbers, omitting: eqnarray. (line 29)
+ (line 58)
+* equation numbers, omitting: eqnarray. (line 41)
* equations, aligning: eqnarray. (line 6)
* equations, environment for: equation. (line 6)
* equations, flush left vs. centered: Document class options.
- (line 32)
+ (line 52)
* es-zet German letter: Non-English characters.
(line 47)
* eth, Icelandic letter: Non-English characters.
(line 19)
* euro symbol: Text symbols. (line 119)
+* ex: Units of length. (line 38)
* exclamation point, upside-down: Text symbols. (line 122)
* exponent: Subscripts & superscripts.
(line 6)
-* external files, creating: filecontents. (line 6)
+* external files, writing: filecontents. (line 6)
+* families, of fonts: Low-level font commands.
+ (line 20)
* feminine ordinal symbol: Text symbols. (line 135)
* figure number, cross referencing: \ref. (line 6)
* figures, footnotes in: minipage. (line 21)
* figures, inserting: figure. (line 6)
-* fixed-width font: Font styles. (line 128)
-* 'float' package: figure. (line 38)
+* fixed-width font: Font styles. (line 92)
+* 'float' package: Floats. (line 52)
+* float page: Floats. (line 58)
* flush left equations: Document class options.
- (line 32)
+ (line 52)
* flushing floats and starting a page: \clearpage. (line 6)
+* font catalogue: Low-level font commands.
+ (line 20)
* font commands, low-level: Low-level font commands.
(line 6)
+* font size: Low-level font commands.
+ (line 98)
* font sizes: Font sizes. (line 6)
* font styles: Font styles. (line 6)
* fonts: Fonts. (line 6)
@@ -6329,35 +8232,40 @@ Concept Index
* footnote parameters: Footnote parameters. (line 6)
* footnotes in figures: minipage. (line 21)
* footnotes, creating: Footnotes. (line 6)
-* footnotes, symbolic instead of numbered: Symbolic footnotes.
+* Footnotes, in a minipage: \footnote. (line 35)
+* Footnotes, in a table: Footnotes in a table.
(line 6)
+* footnotes, symbols instead of numbers: \footnote. (line 23)
* formulas, environment for: equation. (line 6)
* formulas, math: Math formulas. (line 6)
* forward references, resolving: Output files. (line 33)
* fragile commands: \protect. (line 6)
* French quotation marks: Text symbols. (line 30)
* functions, math: Math functions. (line 6)
+* 'geometry' package: Document class options.
+ (line 37)
* global options: Document class options.
(line 6)
* global options <1>: Document class options.
- (line 83)
+ (line 103)
* glossaries: Glossaries. (line 6)
* glossary package: Glossaries. (line 15)
+* glue register, plain TeX: \newlength. (line 6)
* graphics packages: \line. (line 13)
* grave accent: Accents. (line 37)
* grave accent, math: Math accents. (line 29)
* greater than symbol, in text: Text symbols. (line 125)
* greek letters: Math symbols. (line 6)
* ha'c<ek accent, math: Math accents. (line 20)
-* hacek accent: Accents. (line 95)
+* hacek accent: Accents. (line 97)
* hat accent: Accents. (line 33)
* hat accent, math: Math accents. (line 32)
* header style: \pagestyle. (line 6)
* header, parameters for: Page layout parameters.
(line 6)
* hello, world: Starting and ending. (line 6)
-* here, putting floats: figure. (line 38)
-* hungarian umlaut accent: Accents. (line 58)
+* here, putting floats: Floats. (line 52)
+* hungarian umlaut accent: Accents. (line 59)
* hyphenation, defining: \hyphenation. (line 6)
* hyphenation, forcing: \- (hyphenation). (line 6)
* hyphenation, preventing: \mbox. (line 6)
@@ -6376,13 +8284,13 @@ Concept Index
* indexes: Indexes. (line 6)
* infinite horizontal stretch: \hfill. (line 6)
* infinite vertical stretch: \vfill. (line 6)
-* initial command: filecontents. (line 14)
* input file: Splitting the input. (line 6)
-* input/output: Terminal input/output.
+* input/output, to terminal: Terminal input/output.
(line 6)
* inserting figures: figure. (line 6)
+* insertions of special characters: Special insertions. (line 6)
* italic correction: \/. (line 6)
-* italic font: Font styles. (line 113)
+* italic font: Font styles. (line 77)
* justification, ragged left: \raggedleft. (line 6)
* justification, ragged right: \raggedright. (line 6)
* Knuth, Donald E.: Overview. (line 6)
@@ -6390,7 +8298,7 @@ Concept Index
* Lamport TeX: Overview. (line 24)
* Lamport, Leslie: Overview. (line 6)
* landscape orientation: Document class options.
- (line 35)
+ (line 55)
* LaTeX logo: Text symbols. (line 21)
* LaTeX overview: Overview. (line 6)
* LaTeX Project team: About this document. (line 17)
@@ -6406,22 +8314,22 @@ Concept Index
* left quote, double: Text symbols. (line 144)
* left quote, single: Text symbols. (line 150)
* left-hand equation numbers: Document class options.
- (line 38)
+ (line 58)
* left-justifying text: \raggedright. (line 6)
* left-justifying text, environment for: flushleft. (line 6)
* left-to-right mode: Modes. (line 6)
* lengths, adding to: \addtolength. (line 6)
+* lengths, allocating new: \newlength. (line 6)
* lengths, defining and using: Lengths. (line 6)
-* lengths, defining new: \newlength. (line 6)
* lengths, predefined: Predefined lengths. (line 6)
* lengths, setting: \setlength. (line 6)
* less than symbol, in text: Text symbols. (line 128)
-* letters: Letters. (line 6)
* letters, accented: Accents. (line 6)
* letters, ending: \closing. (line 6)
* letters, non-English: Non-English characters.
(line 6)
* letters, starting: \opening. (line 6)
+* letters, writing: Letters. (line 6)
* line break, forcing: \\. (line 6)
* line breaking: Line breaking. (line 6)
* line breaks, forcing: \linebreak & \nolinebreak.
@@ -6429,7 +8337,7 @@ Concept Index
* line breaks, preventing: \linebreak & \nolinebreak.
(line 6)
* lines in tables: tabular. (line 6)
-* lining numerals: Font styles. (line 88)
+* lining numerals: Font styles. (line 134)
* lining text up in tables: tabular. (line 6)
* lining text up using tab stops: tabbing. (line 6)
* list items, specifying counter: \usecounter. (line 6)
@@ -6439,7 +8347,7 @@ Concept Index
* lists of items, generic: list. (line 6)
* lists of items, numbered: enumerate. (line 6)
* loading additional packages: Document class options.
- (line 75)
+ (line 95)
* log file: Output files. (line 28)
* logo, LaTeX: Text symbols. (line 21)
* logo, LaTeX2e: Text symbols. (line 24)
@@ -6450,6 +8358,7 @@ Concept Index
* LR mode: Modes. (line 6)
* 'ltugboat' class: tugboat template. (line 6)
* LuaTeX: TeX engines. (line 29)
+* m-width: Units of length. (line 38)
* macro package, LaTeX as: Overview. (line 11)
* macron accent: Accents. (line 29)
* macron accent, math: Math accents. (line 14)
@@ -6469,11 +8378,14 @@ Concept Index
* math mode, spacing: Spacing in math mode.
(line 6)
* math symbols: Math symbols. (line 6)
-* math, bold: Font styles. (line 84)
+* math, bold: Font styles. (line 130)
+* Millimeter: Units of length. (line 27)
* minipage, creating a: minipage. (line 6)
* modes: Modes. (line 6)
-* monospace font: Font styles. (line 128)
+* monospace font: Font styles. (line 92)
* moving arguments: \protect. (line 6)
+* mpfootnote counter: \footnote. (line 35)
+* mu, math unit: Units of length. (line 49)
* multicolumn text: \twocolumn. (line 6)
* multilingual support: Accents. (line 6)
* 'multind' package: Indexes. (line 39)
@@ -6482,6 +8394,7 @@ Concept Index
* nested '\include', not allowed: \include. (line 18)
* new commands, defining: \newcommand & \renewcommand.
(line 6)
+* new commands, defining <1>: \providecommand. (line 6)
* new line, output as input: \obeycr & \restorecr.
(line 6)
* new line, starting: \\. (line 6)
@@ -6492,19 +8405,19 @@ Concept Index
* notes in the margin: Marginal notes. (line 6)
* null delimiter: Math miscellany. (line 21)
* numbered items, specifying counter: \usecounter. (line 6)
-* numerals, old-style: Font styles. (line 88)
-* oblique font: Font styles. (line 125)
+* numerals, old-style: Font styles. (line 134)
+* oblique font: Font styles. (line 89)
* oe ligature: Non-English characters.
(line 43)
-* ogonek: Accents. (line 69)
-* old-style numerals: Font styles. (line 88)
+* ogonek: Accents. (line 70)
+* old-style numerals: Font styles. (line 134)
* one-column output: \onecolumn. (line 6)
* opening quote: Text symbols. (line 40)
* OpenType fonts: TeX engines. (line 6)
* options, document class: Document class options.
(line 6)
* options, global: Document class options.
- (line 83)
+ (line 103)
* ordinals, feminine and masculine: Text symbols. (line 135)
* oslash: Non-English characters.
(line 39)
@@ -6512,7 +8425,7 @@ Concept Index
* overdot accent, math: Math accents. (line 26)
* overview of LaTeX: Overview. (line 6)
* packages, loading additional: Document class options.
- (line 75)
+ (line 95)
* page break, forcing: \pagebreak & \nopagebreak.
(line 6)
* page break, preventing: \pagebreak & \nopagebreak.
@@ -6524,8 +8437,9 @@ Concept Index
* page numbering style: \pagenumbering. (line 6)
* page styles: Page styles. (line 6)
* paragraph indentation, in minipage: minipage. (line 17)
-* paragraph indentations in quoted text: quotation. (line 6)
-* paragraph indentations in quoted text, omitting: quote. (line 6)
+* paragraph indentations in quoted text: quotation and quote. (line 6)
+* paragraph indentations in quoted text, omitting: quotation and quote.
+ (line 6)
* paragraph mode: Modes. (line 6)
* paragraph symbol: Text symbols. (line 44)
* paragraphs: Making paragraphs. (line 6)
@@ -6535,27 +8449,32 @@ Concept Index
* pdfTeX: Output files. (line 20)
* pdfTeX engine: TeX engines. (line 12)
* period, centered, in text: Text symbols. (line 138)
+* pica: Units of length. (line 14)
* 'pict2e' package: \line. (line 13)
* pictures, creating: picture. (line 6)
* pilcrow: Text symbols. (line 44)
-* placement of floats: figure. (line 19)
+* placement of floats: Floats. (line 31)
* poetry, an environment for: verse. (line 6)
+* Point: Units of length. (line 10)
* polish l: Non-English characters.
(line 31)
* portrait orientation: Document class options.
- (line 35)
+ (line 55)
+* position, in picture: picture. (line 23)
* postscript, in letters: \ps. (line 6)
* pounds symbol: Text symbols. (line 48)
* preamble, defined: Starting and ending. (line 19)
* predefined lengths: Predefined lengths. (line 6)
* prompt, '*': Command line. (line 18)
* pronunciation: Overview. (line 24)
+* quad: Spacing in math mode.
+ (line 32)
* question mark, upside-down: Text symbols. (line 141)
* quotation marks, French: Text symbols. (line 30)
* quote, straight base: Text symbols. (line 157)
-* quoted text with paragraph indentation, displaying: quotation.
+* quoted text with paragraph indentation, displaying: quotation and quote.
(line 6)
-* quoted text without paragraph indentation, displaying: quote.
+* quoted text without paragraph indentation, displaying: quotation and quote.
(line 6)
* ragged left text: \raggedleft. (line 6)
* ragged left text, environment for: flushright. (line 6)
@@ -6575,25 +8494,31 @@ Concept Index
* right quote, double: Text symbols. (line 147)
* right quote, single: Text symbols. (line 153)
* right-hand equation numbers: Document class options.
- (line 38)
+ (line 58)
* right-justifying text: \raggedleft. (line 6)
* right-justifying text, environment for: flushright. (line 6)
-* ring accent: Accents. (line 74)
+* ring accent: Accents. (line 75)
* ring accent, math: Math accents. (line 41)
-* robust commands: \protect. (line 16)
-* roman font: Font styles. (line 116)
+* robust commands: \protect. (line 6)
+* roman font: Font styles. (line 80)
+* rubber lengths, defining new: \newlength. (line 6)
* running header and footer: Page layout parameters.
(line 6)
* running header and footer style: \pagestyle. (line 6)
-* sans serif font: Font styles. (line 122)
-* script letters for math: Font styles. (line 107)
+* sans serif font: Font styles. (line 86)
+* Scaled point: Units of length. (line 36)
+* script letters for math: Font styles. (line 74)
* section number, cross referencing: \ref. (line 6)
* section numbers, printing: Sectioning. (line 47)
* section symbol: Text symbols. (line 58)
-* sectioning: Sectioning. (line 6)
+* sectioning commands: Sectioning. (line 6)
+* series, of fonts: Low-level font commands.
+ (line 45)
* 'setspace' package: Low-level font commands.
- (line 52)
+ (line 114)
* setting counters: \setcounter. (line 6)
+* shapes, of fonts: Low-level font commands.
+ (line 85)
* sharp S letters: Non-English characters.
(line 47)
* 'showidx' package: Indexes. (line 35)
@@ -6604,20 +8529,24 @@ Concept Index
* single low-9 quotation mark: Text symbols. (line 52)
* single right quote: Text symbols. (line 153)
* sizes of text: Font sizes. (line 6)
-* slanted font: Font styles. (line 125)
-* small caps font: Font styles. (line 119)
+* skip register, plain TeX: \newlength. (line 6)
+* slanted font: Font styles. (line 89)
+* small caps font: Font styles. (line 83)
* space, inserting vertical: \addvspace. (line 6)
+* space, vertical: \vspace. (line 6)
* spaces: Spaces. (line 6)
* spacing within math mode: Spacing in math mode.
(line 6)
+* spacing, intersentence: \frenchspacing. (line 6)
* Spanish ordinals, feminine and masculine: Text symbols. (line 135)
* special characters: Non-English characters.
(line 6)
-* specifier, float placement: figure. (line 19)
+* special insertions: Special insertions. (line 6)
+* specifier, float placement: Floats. (line 31)
* splitting the input file: Splitting the input. (line 6)
-* starting & ending: Starting and ending. (line 6)
* starting a new page: \newpage. (line 6)
* starting a new page and clearing floats: \clearpage. (line 6)
+* starting and ending: Starting and ending. (line 6)
* starting on a right-hand page: \cleardoublepage. (line 6)
* sterling symbol: Text symbols. (line 48)
* straight double quote, base: Text symbols. (line 157)
@@ -6632,28 +8561,34 @@ Concept Index
* superscript: Subscripts & superscripts.
(line 6)
* symbols, math: Math symbols. (line 6)
+* symbols, text: Text symbols. (line 6)
* tab stops, using: tabbing. (line 6)
* table of contents entry, manually adding: \addcontentsline. (line 6)
* table of contents file: Output files. (line 43)
* table of contents, creating: Tables of contents. (line 6)
* tables, creating: table. (line 6)
+* template, 'beamer': beamer template. (line 6)
+* template, 'book': book template. (line 6)
+* template, TUGboat: tugboat template. (line 6)
+* templates, document: Document templates. (line 6)
* terminal input/output: Terminal input/output.
(line 6)
* TeX logo: Text symbols. (line 61)
* text symbols: Text symbols. (line 6)
-* 'textcomp' package: Font styles. (line 88)
+* 'textcomp' package: Font styles. (line 134)
* thanks, for titlepage: \maketitle. (line 22)
+* theorem-like environment: \newtheorem. (line 6)
* theorems, defining: \newtheorem. (line 6)
* theorems, typesetting: theorem. (line 6)
* thorn, Icelandic letter: Non-English characters.
(line 51)
* three-quarters em-dash: Text symbols. (line 166)
-* tie-after accent: Accents. (line 80)
+* tie-after accent: Accents. (line 81)
* tilde accent: Accents. (line 43)
* tilde accent, math: Math accents. (line 44)
* tilde, ASCII, in text: Text symbols. (line 67)
* title page, separate or run-in: Document class options.
- (line 46)
+ (line 66)
* title pages, creating: titlepage. (line 6)
* title, for titlepage: \maketitle. (line 26)
* titles, making: \maketitle. (line 6)
@@ -6663,16 +8598,17 @@ Concept Index
* TUGboat template: tugboat template. (line 6)
* two-column output: \twocolumn. (line 6)
* two-thirds em-dash: Text symbols. (line 172)
+* type styles: Font styles. (line 6)
* typed text, simulating: verbatim. (line 6)
* typeface sizes: Font sizes. (line 6)
-* typeface styles: Font styles. (line 6)
* typefaces: Fonts. (line 6)
-* typewriter font: Font styles. (line 128)
-* typewriter labels in lists: description. (line 18)
+* typewriter font: Font styles. (line 92)
+* typewriter labels in lists: description. (line 23)
* umlaut accent: Accents. (line 16)
-* underbar: Accents. (line 88)
+* underbar: Accents. (line 89)
* underscore, in text: Text symbols. (line 175)
* Unicode input, native: TeX engines. (line 6)
+* units, of length: Units of length. (line 6)
* unofficial nature of this manual: About this document. (line 17)
* unordered lists: itemize. (line 6)
* using BibTeX: Using BibTeX. (line 6)
@@ -6684,12 +8620,20 @@ Concept Index
* vertical bar, double, in text: Text symbols. (line 79)
* vertical bar, in text: Text symbols. (line 76)
* vertical space: \addvspace. (line 6)
+* vertical space <1>: \vspace. (line 6)
* vertical space before paragraphs: \parskip. (line 6)
* visible space: \verb. (line 17)
* visible space symbol, in text: Text symbols. (line 178)
+* weights, of fonts: Low-level font commands.
+ (line 55)
+* white space: Spaces. (line 6)
* wide hat accent, math: Math accents. (line 50)
-* wide tile accent, math: Math accents. (line 53)
+* wide tilde accent, math: Math accents. (line 53)
+* widths, of fonts: Low-level font commands.
+ (line 67)
* writing external files: filecontents. (line 6)
+* writing letters: Letters. (line 6)
+* x-height: Units of length. (line 38)
* XeTeX: TeX engines. (line 38)
* 'xindy' program: Indexes. (line 23)
@@ -6703,9 +8647,11 @@ Command Index
* Menu:
* $: Math formulas. (line 24)
+* &: tabular. (line 32)
* --help command-line option: Command line. (line 14)
* .aux file: Output files. (line 33)
* .dvi file: Output files. (line 10)
+* .fd file: \newfont. (line 16)
* .lof file: Output files. (line 43)
* .lof file <1>: Tables of contents. (line 16)
* .log file: Output files. (line 28)
@@ -6715,17 +8661,19 @@ Command Index
* .tex, default extension: Command line. (line 6)
* .toc file: Output files. (line 43)
* .toc file <1>: Tables of contents. (line 6)
+* .xdv file: TeX engines. (line 38)
* 10pt option: Document class options.
(line 14)
* 11pt option: Document class options.
(line 14)
* 12pt option: Document class options.
(line 14)
-* @{...}: array. (line 30)
* [...] for optional arguments: LaTeX command syntax.
(line 6)
* \ character starting commands: LaTeX command syntax.
(line 6)
+* \!: Spacing in math mode.
+ (line 29)
* \" (umlaut accent): Accents. (line 16)
* \#: Reserved characters. (line 11)
* \$: Reserved characters. (line 11)
@@ -6734,28 +8682,29 @@ Command Index
* \' (acute accent): Accents. (line 20)
* \' (tabbing): tabbing. (line 45)
* \(: Math formulas. (line 16)
+* \(SPACE): \(SPACE) and \@. (line 6)
* \): Math formulas. (line 16)
* \*: Math miscellany. (line 6)
* \+: tabbing. (line 37)
* \,: Spacing in math mode.
- (line 17)
+ (line 25)
* \-: tabbing. (line 41)
* \- (hyphenation): \- (hyphenation). (line 6)
* \. (dot-over accent): Accents. (line 25)
* \/: \/. (line 6)
* \:: Spacing in math mode.
- (line 15)
+ (line 21)
* \;: Spacing in math mode.
- (line 12)
+ (line 16)
* \<: tabbing. (line 33)
* \= (macron accent): Accents. (line 29)
* \= (tabbing): tabbing. (line 27)
* \>: tabbing. (line 31)
* \> <1>: Spacing in math mode.
- (line 15)
+ (line 21)
* \> (tabbing): tabbing. (line 30)
-* \@: \@. (line 6)
-* \@fnsymbol: Symbolic footnotes. (line 11)
+* \@: \(SPACE) and \@. (line 6)
+* \@fnsymbol: \footnote. (line 23)
* \a (tabbing): tabbing. (line 60)
* \a' (acute accent in tabbing): tabbing. (line 61)
* \a= (macron accent in tabbing): tabbing. (line 61)
@@ -6774,203 +8723,225 @@ Command Index
(line 15)
* \AE (AE): Non-English characters.
(line 15)
-* \aleph: Math symbols. (line 14)
+* \aleph: Math symbols. (line 19)
* \alph: \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol.
- (line 9)
+ (line 10)
* \Alph: \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol.
- (line 12)
-* \Alph example: enumerate. (line 39)
-* \alpha: Math symbols. (line 17)
+ (line 13)
+* \Alph example: enumerate. (line 52)
+* \alpha: Math symbols. (line 22)
* \alsoname: Indexes. (line 20)
-* \amalg: Math symbols. (line 20)
+* \amalg: Math symbols. (line 25)
* \and for '\author': \maketitle. (line 12)
-* \angle: Math symbols. (line 23)
+* \angle: Math symbols. (line 28)
* \appendix: Sectioning. (line 37)
-* \approx: Math symbols. (line 26)
+* \approx: Math symbols. (line 33)
* \arabic: \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol.
- (line 15)
+ (line 16)
* \arccos: Math functions. (line 9)
* \arcsin: Math functions. (line 12)
* \arctan: Math functions. (line 15)
* \arg: Math functions. (line 18)
-* \arraycolsep: array. (line 42)
-* \arrayrulewidth: tabular. (line 100)
-* \arraystretch: tabular. (line 104)
-* \ast: Math symbols. (line 29)
-* \asymp: Math symbols. (line 32)
+* \arraycolsep: array. (line 38)
+* \arrayrulewidth: tabular. (line 156)
+* \arraystretch: tabular. (line 162)
+* \ast: Math symbols. (line 36)
+* \asymp: Math symbols. (line 45)
+* \AtBeginDocument: \AtBeginDocument. (line 3)
+* \AtEndDocument: \AtEndDocument. (line 3)
* \author{NAME \and NAME2}: \maketitle. (line 11)
* \a` (grave accent in tabbing): tabbing. (line 61)
* \b (bar-under accent): Accents. (line 46)
-* \backslash: Math symbols. (line 35)
+* \backslash: Math symbols. (line 48)
* \backslash <1>: Reserved characters. (line 16)
* \bar: Math accents. (line 13)
* \baselineskip: Low-level font commands.
- (line 46)
+ (line 98)
* \baselinestretch: Low-level font commands.
- (line 52)
+ (line 108)
* \begin: Environments. (line 6)
-* \beta: Math symbols. (line 38)
-* \bf: Font styles. (line 103)
-* \bfseries: Font styles. (line 42)
+* \beta: Math symbols. (line 52)
+* \bf: Font styles. (line 70)
+* \bfseries: Font styles. (line 39)
* \bibitem: \bibitem. (line 6)
* \bibliography: Using BibTeX. (line 6)
* \bibliographystyle: Using BibTeX. (line 6)
-* \bigcap: Math symbols. (line 41)
-* \bigcap <1>: Math symbols. (line 71)
-* \bigcirc: Math symbols. (line 44)
-* \bigcup: Math symbols. (line 47)
-* \bigodot: Math symbols. (line 50)
-* \bigoplus: Math symbols. (line 53)
-* \bigotimes: Math symbols. (line 56)
+* \bigcap: Math symbols. (line 55)
+* \bigcirc: Math symbols. (line 59)
+* \bigcup: Math symbols. (line 63)
+* \bigodot: Math symbols. (line 67)
+* \bigoplus: Math symbols. (line 70)
+* \bigotimes: Math symbols. (line 73)
* \bigskip: \bigskip \medskip \smallskip.
(line 10)
* \bigskipamount: \bigskip \medskip \smallskip.
(line 10)
-* \bigsqcup: Math symbols. (line 65)
-* \bigtriangledown: Math symbols. (line 59)
-* \bigtriangleup: Math symbols. (line 62)
-* \biguplus: Math symbols. (line 68)
-* \bigwedge: Math symbols. (line 74)
+* \bigsqcup: Math symbols. (line 84)
+* \bigtriangledown: Math symbols. (line 76)
+* \bigtriangleup: Math symbols. (line 80)
+* \biguplus: Math symbols. (line 87)
+* \bigvee: Math symbols. (line 91)
+* \bigwedge: Math symbols. (line 94)
* \bmod: Math functions. (line 21)
* \boldmath: Math formulas. (line 29)
-* \bot: Math symbols. (line 77)
-* \bottomfraction: figure. (line 67)
-* \bowtie: Math symbols. (line 80)
-* \Box: Math symbols. (line 83)
+* \bot: Math symbols. (line 97)
+* \bottomfraction: Floats. (line 94)
+* \bottomfraction <1>: Floats. (line 95)
+* \bowtie: Math symbols. (line 101)
+* \Box: Math symbols. (line 104)
* \breve: Math accents. (line 16)
-* \bullet: Math symbols. (line 86)
-* \c (cedilla accent): Accents. (line 50)
-* \cal: Font styles. (line 106)
-* \cap: Math symbols. (line 89)
+* \bullet: Math symbols. (line 109)
+* \c (cedilla accent): Accents. (line 51)
+* \cal: Font styles. (line 73)
+* \cap: Math symbols. (line 112)
* \capitalacute: Accents. (line 20)
-* \capitalbreve: Accents. (line 85)
-* \capitalcaron: Accents. (line 95)
-* \capitalcedilla: Accents. (line 50)
+* \capitalbreve: Accents. (line 86)
+* \capitalcaron: Accents. (line 97)
+* \capitalcedilla: Accents. (line 51)
* \capitalcircumflex: Accents. (line 33)
* \capitaldieresis: Accents. (line 16)
-* \capitaldotaccent: Accents. (line 54)
+* \capitaldotaccent: Accents. (line 55)
* \capitalgrave: Accents. (line 37)
-* \capitalhungarumlaut: Accents. (line 58)
+* \capitalhungarumlaut: Accents. (line 59)
* \capitalmacron: Accents. (line 29)
-* \capitalnewtie: Accents. (line 80)
-* \capitalogonek: Accents. (line 69)
-* \capitalring: Accents. (line 74)
-* \capitaltie: Accents. (line 80)
+* \capitalnewtie: Accents. (line 81)
+* \capitalogonek: Accents. (line 70)
+* \capitalring: Accents. (line 75)
+* \capitaltie: Accents. (line 81)
* \capitaltilde: Accents. (line 43)
-* \caption: figure. (line 60)
+* \caption: figure. (line 40)
+* \caption <1>: table. (line 26)
* \cc: \cc. (line 6)
-* \cdot: Math symbols. (line 92)
+* \cdot: Math symbols. (line 117)
* \cdots: Math miscellany. (line 10)
* \centering: \centering. (line 6)
* \chapter: Sectioning. (line 9)
* \check: Math accents. (line 19)
-* \chi: Math symbols. (line 95)
-* \circ: Math symbols. (line 98)
+* \chi: Math symbols. (line 120)
+* \circ: Math symbols. (line 123)
* \circle: \circle. (line 6)
* \cite: \cite. (line 6)
* \cleardoublepage: \cleardoublepage. (line 6)
* \clearpage: \clearpage. (line 6)
* \cline: \cline. (line 6)
* \closing: \closing. (line 6)
-* \clubsuit: Math symbols. (line 101)
-* \columnsep: \twocolumn. (line 16)
-* \columnseprule: \twocolumn. (line 19)
-* \columnwidth: \twocolumn. (line 23)
-* \cong: Math symbols. (line 104)
+* \clubsuit: Math symbols. (line 128)
+* \columnsep: \twocolumn. (line 21)
+* \columnsep <1>: Page layout parameters.
+ (line 6)
+* \columnsep <2>: Page layout parameters.
+ (line 9)
+* \columnseprule: \twocolumn. (line 27)
+* \columnseprule <1>: Page layout parameters.
+ (line 7)
+* \columnseprule <2>: Page layout parameters.
+ (line 9)
+* \columnwidth: \twocolumn. (line 34)
+* \columnwidth <1>: Page layout parameters.
+ (line 8)
+* \columnwidth <2>: Page layout parameters.
+ (line 9)
+* \complement: Math symbols. (line 131)
+* \cong: Math symbols. (line 137)
* \contentsline: \addcontentsline. (line 29)
-* \coprod: Math symbols. (line 107)
+* \coprod: Math symbols. (line 140)
* \copyright: Text symbols. (line 10)
* \cos: Math functions. (line 24)
* \cosh: Math functions. (line 27)
* \cot: Math functions. (line 30)
* \coth: Math functions. (line 33)
* \csc: Math functions. (line 36)
-* \cup: Math symbols. (line 110)
-* \d (dot-under accent): Accents. (line 54)
+* \cup: Math symbols. (line 143)
+* \d (dot-under accent): Accents. (line 55)
* \dag: Text symbols. (line 14)
-* \dagger: Math symbols. (line 113)
+* \dagger: Math symbols. (line 148)
* \dashbox: \dashbox. (line 6)
-* \dashv: Math symbols. (line 116)
+* \dashv: Math symbols. (line 151)
* \date{TEXT}: \maketitle. (line 17)
* \day: \day \month \year. (line 6)
-* \dblfloatpagefraction: \twocolumn. (line 34)
-* \dblfloatsep: \twocolumn. (line 38)
-* \dbltextfloatsep: \twocolumn. (line 43)
-* \dbltopfraction: \twocolumn. (line 29)
+* \dblfloatpagefraction: \twocolumn. (line 68)
+* \dblfloatsep: \twocolumn. (line 74)
+* \dbltextfloatsep: \twocolumn. (line 81)
+* \dbltopfraction: \twocolumn. (line 46)
+* \dbltopnumber: \twocolumn. (line 86)
* \ddag: Text symbols. (line 17)
-* \ddagger: Math symbols. (line 119)
+* \ddagger: Math symbols. (line 155)
* \ddot: Math accents. (line 22)
* \ddots: Math miscellany. (line 14)
* \deg: Math functions. (line 39)
-* \Delta: Math symbols. (line 122)
-* \delta: Math symbols. (line 125)
+* \Delta: Math symbols. (line 158)
+* \delta: Math symbols. (line 161)
* \depth: Predefined lengths. (line 10)
* \det: Math functions. (line 42)
* \dh (d): Non-English characters.
(line 19)
* \DH (D): Non-English characters.
(line 19)
-* \Diamond: Math symbols. (line 128)
-* \diamond: Math symbols. (line 131)
-* \diamondsuit: Math symbols. (line 134)
+* \Diamond: Math symbols. (line 164)
+* \diamond: Math symbols. (line 168)
+* \diamondsuit: Math symbols. (line 172)
* \dim: Math functions. (line 45)
* \displaystyle: Math formulas. (line 34)
-* \div: Math symbols. (line 137)
+* \div: Math symbols. (line 175)
* \dj: Non-English characters.
(line 23)
* \DJ: Non-English characters.
(line 23)
* \documentclass: Document classes. (line 6)
-* \documentclass, commands before: filecontents. (line 14)
* \dot: Math accents. (line 25)
-* \doteq: Math symbols. (line 140)
-* \dotfill: \dotfill. (line 6)
+* \doteq: Math symbols. (line 178)
+* \dotfill: \hrulefill \dotfill. (line 6)
* \dots: Text symbols. (line 34)
-* \doublerulesep: tabular. (line 108)
-* \downarrow: Math symbols. (line 143)
-* \Downarrow: Math symbols. (line 146)
-* \ell: Math symbols. (line 149)
-* \em: Font styles. (line 109)
-* \emph: Font styles. (line 36)
-* \emptyset: Math symbols. (line 152)
+* \doublerulesep: tabular. (line 167)
+* \downarrow: Math symbols. (line 182)
+* \Downarrow: Math symbols. (line 186)
+* \ell: Math symbols. (line 190)
+* \emph: Font styles. (line 59)
+* \emptyset: Math symbols. (line 193)
* \encl: \encl. (line 6)
* \end: Environments. (line 6)
* \enlargethispage: \enlargethispage. (line 6)
-* \enumi: enumerate. (line 29)
-* \enumii: enumerate. (line 29)
-* \enumiii: enumerate. (line 29)
-* \enumiv: enumerate. (line 29)
-* \epsilon: Math symbols. (line 155)
-* \equiv: Math symbols. (line 158)
-* \eta: Math symbols. (line 161)
+* \enumi: enumerate. (line 42)
+* \enumii: enumerate. (line 42)
+* \enumiii: enumerate. (line 42)
+* \enumiv: enumerate. (line 42)
+* \epsilon: Math symbols. (line 197)
+* \equiv: Math symbols. (line 202)
+* \eta: Math symbols. (line 205)
* \evensidemargin: Document class options.
- (line 57)
-* \exists: Math symbols. (line 164)
+ (line 77)
+* \evensidemargin <1>: Page layout parameters.
+ (line 67)
+* \evensidemargin <2>: Page layout parameters.
+ (line 68)
+* \exists: Math symbols. (line 208)
* \exp: Math functions. (line 48)
-* \extracolsep: tabular. (line 71)
+* \extracolsep: tabular. (line 115)
* \fbox: \fbox and \framebox. (line 6)
* \fboxrule: \framebox (picture). (line 14)
* \fboxrule <1>: \fbox and \framebox. (line 18)
* \fboxsep: \framebox (picture). (line 14)
* \fboxsep <1>: \fbox and \framebox. (line 18)
* \fill: \hfill. (line 9)
-* \flat: Math symbols. (line 167)
-* \floatpagefraction: figure. (line 70)
-* \floatsep: figure. (line 85)
+* \flat: Math symbols. (line 211)
+* \floatpagefraction: Floats. (line 98)
+* \floatpagefraction <1>: Floats. (line 99)
+* \floatsep: Floats. (line 114)
+* \floatsep <1>: Floats. (line 115)
* \flushbottom: \flushbottom. (line 6)
* \fnsymbol: \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol.
- (line 24)
-* \fnsymbol, and footnotes: Symbolic footnotes. (line 11)
+ (line 25)
+* \fnsymbol, and footnotes: \footnote. (line 23)
* \fontencoding: Low-level font commands.
(line 11)
* \fontfamily: Low-level font commands.
- (line 14)
+ (line 20)
* \fontseries: Low-level font commands.
- (line 23)
+ (line 45)
* \fontshape: Low-level font commands.
- (line 34)
+ (line 85)
* \fontsize: Low-level font commands.
- (line 46)
+ (line 98)
* \footnote: \footnote. (line 6)
* \footnotemark: \footnotemark. (line 6)
* \footnoterule: Footnote parameters. (line 6)
@@ -6978,22 +8949,25 @@ Command Index
* \footnotesize: Font sizes. (line 11)
* \footnotetext: \footnotetext. (line 6)
* \footskip: Page layout parameters.
- (line 16)
-* \forall: Math symbols. (line 170)
+ (line 26)
+* \footskip <1>: Page layout parameters.
+ (line 27)
+* \forall: Math symbols. (line 214)
* \frac: Math miscellany. (line 18)
* \frac{num}{den}: Math miscellany. (line 17)
* \frame: \frame. (line 6)
* \framebox: \framebox (picture). (line 6)
* \framebox <1>: \fbox and \framebox. (line 6)
-* \frown: Math symbols. (line 173)
+* \frenchspacing: \frenchspacing. (line 6)
+* \frown: Math symbols. (line 217)
* \fussy: \fussy. (line 6)
-* \Gamma: Math symbols. (line 176)
-* \gamma: Math symbols. (line 179)
+* \Gamma: Math symbols. (line 220)
+* \gamma: Math symbols. (line 223)
* \gcd: Math functions. (line 51)
-* \ge: Math symbols. (line 182)
-* \geq: Math symbols. (line 185)
-* \gets: Math symbols. (line 188)
-* \gg: Math symbols. (line 191)
+* \ge: Math symbols. (line 226)
+* \geq: Math symbols. (line 230)
+* \gets: Math symbols. (line 234)
+* \gg: Math symbols. (line 237)
* \glossary: Glossaries. (line 8)
* \glossaryentry: Glossaries. (line 11)
* \grave: Math accents. (line 28)
@@ -7001,59 +8975,67 @@ Command Index
* \guillemotright (>>): Text symbols. (line 27)
* \guilsinglleft (<): Text symbols. (line 28)
* \guilsinglright (>): Text symbols. (line 29)
-* \H (Hungarian umlaut accent): Accents. (line 58)
+* \H (Hungarian umlaut accent): Accents. (line 59)
* \hat: Math accents. (line 31)
-* \hbar: Math symbols. (line 194)
+* \hbar: Math symbols. (line 241)
* \headheight: Page layout parameters.
- (line 6)
+ (line 14)
+* \headheight <1>: Page layout parameters.
+ (line 15)
* \headsep: Page layout parameters.
- (line 11)
-* \heartsuit: Math symbols. (line 197)
+ (line 19)
+* \headsep <1>: Page layout parameters.
+ (line 20)
+* \heartsuit: Math symbols. (line 244)
* \height: Predefined lengths. (line 8)
* \hfill: \hfill. (line 6)
* \hline: \hline. (line 6)
* \hom: Math functions. (line 54)
-* \hookleftarrow: Math symbols. (line 200)
-* \hookrightarrow: Math symbols. (line 203)
-* \hrulefill: \hrulefill. (line 6)
+* \hookleftarrow: Math symbols. (line 247)
+* \hookrightarrow: Math symbols. (line 250)
+* \hrulefill: \hrulefill \dotfill. (line 6)
* \hsize: Page layout parameters.
- (line 56)
+ (line 119)
+* \hsize <1>: Page layout parameters.
+ (line 119)
* \hspace: \hspace. (line 6)
* \huge: Font sizes. (line 11)
* \Huge: Font sizes. (line 11)
* \hyphenation: \hyphenation. (line 6)
-* \i (dotless i): Accents. (line 62)
-* \iff: Math symbols. (line 206)
+* \i (dotless i): Accents. (line 63)
+* \iff: Math symbols. (line 253)
* \ij (ij): Non-English characters.
(line 27)
* \IJ (IJ): Non-English characters.
(line 27)
-* \Im: Math symbols. (line 209)
+* \Im: Math symbols. (line 257)
* \imath: Math accents. (line 34)
-* \in: Math symbols. (line 212)
+* \in: Math symbols. (line 260)
* \include: \include. (line 6)
* \includeonly: \includeonly. (line 6)
* \indent: \indent. (line 6)
* \index: Indexes. (line 9)
* \indexentry: Indexes. (line 12)
* \inf: Math functions. (line 57)
-* \infty: Math symbols. (line 215)
+* \infty: Math symbols. (line 265)
* \input: \input. (line 6)
-* \int: Math symbols. (line 218)
-* \intextsep: figure. (line 89)
-* \iota: Math symbols. (line 221)
-* \it: Font styles. (line 112)
+* \int: Math symbols. (line 268)
+* \intextsep: Floats. (line 118)
+* \intextsep <1>: Floats. (line 119)
+* \iota: Math symbols. (line 271)
+* \it: Font styles. (line 76)
* \item: description. (line 14)
-* \item <1>: enumerate. (line 19)
-* \item <2>: itemize. (line 6)
+* \item <1>: description. (line 19)
+* \item <2>: enumerate. (line 18)
+* \item <3>: itemize. (line 6)
* \itemindent: itemize. (line 49)
* \itemsep: itemize. (line 71)
* \itshape: Font styles. (line 33)
-* \j (dotless j): Accents. (line 65)
+* \j (dotless j): Accents. (line 66)
* \jmath: Math accents. (line 37)
-* \Join: Math symbols. (line 224)
-* \k (ogonek): Accents. (line 69)
-* \kappa: Math symbols. (line 227)
+* \Join: Math symbols. (line 274)
+* \k (ogonek): Accents. (line 70)
+* \kappa: Math symbols. (line 278)
* \ker: Math functions. (line 60)
* \kill: tabbing. (line 65)
* \l (/l): Non-English characters.
@@ -7061,37 +9043,37 @@ Command Index
* \L (/L): Non-English characters.
(line 31)
* \label: \label. (line 6)
-* \labelenumi: enumerate. (line 33)
-* \labelenumii: enumerate. (line 33)
-* \labelenumiii: enumerate. (line 33)
-* \labelenumiv: enumerate. (line 33)
+* \labelenumi: enumerate. (line 47)
+* \labelenumii: enumerate. (line 47)
+* \labelenumiii: enumerate. (line 47)
+* \labelenumiv: enumerate. (line 47)
* \labelitemi: itemize. (line 29)
* \labelitemii: itemize. (line 29)
* \labelitemiii: itemize. (line 29)
* \labelitemiv: itemize. (line 29)
* \labelsep: itemize. (line 52)
* \labelwidth: itemize. (line 55)
-* \Lambda: Math symbols. (line 230)
-* \lambda: Math symbols. (line 233)
-* \land: Math symbols. (line 236)
-* \langle: Math symbols. (line 239)
+* \Lambda: Math symbols. (line 281)
+* \lambda: Math symbols. (line 284)
+* \land: Math symbols. (line 287)
+* \langle: Math symbols. (line 292)
* \large: Font sizes. (line 11)
* \Large: Font sizes. (line 11)
* \LARGE: Font sizes. (line 11)
* \LaTeX: Text symbols. (line 20)
* \LaTeXe: Text symbols. (line 23)
-* \lbrace: Math symbols. (line 242)
-* \lbrack: Math symbols. (line 245)
-* \lceil: Math symbols. (line 248)
+* \lbrace: Math symbols. (line 297)
+* \lbrack: Math symbols. (line 301)
+* \lceil: Math symbols. (line 305)
* \ldots: Text symbols. (line 33)
-* \le: Math symbols. (line 251)
-* \leadsto: Math symbols. (line 254)
+* \le: Math symbols. (line 309)
+* \leadsto: Math symbols. (line 313)
* \left DELIM1 ... \right DELIM2: Math miscellany. (line 20)
-* \Leftarrow: Math symbols. (line 256)
-* \leftarrow: Math symbols. (line 259)
-* \lefteqn: eqnarray. (line 34)
-* \leftharpoondown: Math symbols. (line 262)
-* \leftharpoonup: Math symbols. (line 265)
+* \Leftarrow: Math symbols. (line 320)
+* \leftarrow: Math symbols. (line 325)
+* \lefteqn: eqnarray. (line 46)
+* \leftharpoondown: Math symbols. (line 329)
+* \leftharpoonup: Math symbols. (line 332)
* \leftmargin: itemize. (line 36)
* \leftmargini: itemize. (line 36)
* \leftmarginii: itemize. (line 36)
@@ -7099,12 +9081,12 @@ Command Index
* \leftmarginiv: itemize. (line 36)
* \leftmarginv: itemize. (line 36)
* \leftmarginvi: itemize. (line 36)
-* \Leftrightarrow: Math symbols. (line 268)
-* \leftrightarrow: Math symbols. (line 271)
-* \leq: Math symbols. (line 274)
-* \lfloor: Math symbols. (line 277)
+* \Leftrightarrow: Math symbols. (line 335)
+* \leftrightarrow: Math symbols. (line 340)
+* \leq: Math symbols. (line 345)
+* \lfloor: Math symbols. (line 349)
* \lg: Math functions. (line 63)
-* \lhd: Math symbols. (line 280)
+* \lhd: Math symbols. (line 352)
* \lim: Math functions. (line 66)
* \liminf: Math functions. (line 69)
* \limsup: Math functions. (line 72)
@@ -7112,23 +9094,25 @@ Command Index
* \linebreak: \linebreak & \nolinebreak.
(line 6)
* \linespread: Low-level font commands.
- (line 59)
+ (line 121)
* \linethickness: \linethickness. (line 6)
* \linewidth: Page layout parameters.
- (line 21)
+ (line 33)
+* \linewidth <1>: Page layout parameters.
+ (line 34)
* \listoffigures: Tables of contents. (line 16)
* \listoftables: Tables of contents. (line 16)
* \listparindent: itemize. (line 58)
-* \ll: Math symbols. (line 283)
+* \ll: Math symbols. (line 359)
* \ln: Math functions. (line 75)
-* \lnot: Math symbols. (line 286)
+* \lnot: Math symbols. (line 363)
* \location: \location. (line 6)
* \log: Math functions. (line 78)
-* \longleftarrow: Math symbols. (line 289)
-* \longleftrightarrow: Math symbols. (line 292)
-* \longmapsto: Math symbols. (line 295)
-* \longrightarrow: Math symbols. (line 298)
-* \lor: Math symbols. (line 301)
+* \longleftarrow: Math symbols. (line 366)
+* \longleftrightarrow: Math symbols. (line 371)
+* \longmapsto: Math symbols. (line 375)
+* \longrightarrow: Math symbols. (line 380)
+* \lor: Math symbols. (line 385)
* \lq: Text symbols. (line 39)
* \makebox: \makebox. (line 6)
* \makebox (for 'picture'): \makebox (picture). (line 6)
@@ -7136,45 +9120,59 @@ Command Index
* \makeindex: Indexes. (line 6)
* \makelabels: \makelabels. (line 6)
* \maketitle: \maketitle. (line 6)
-* \mapsto: Math symbols. (line 304)
+* \mapsto: Math symbols. (line 388)
* \marginpar: Marginal notes. (line 6)
-* \marginparpush: Marginal notes. (line 33)
-* \marginparsep: Marginal notes. (line 37)
-* \marginparwidth: Marginal notes. (line 41)
+* \marginparpush: Page layout parameters.
+ (line 40)
+* \marginparpush <1>: Page layout parameters.
+ (line 43)
+* \marginparpush <2>: Marginal notes. (line 36)
+* \marginparsep: Marginal notes. (line 40)
+* \marginparwidth: Page layout parameters.
+ (line 42)
+* \marginparwidth <1>: Page layout parameters.
+ (line 43)
+* \marginparwidth <2>: Marginal notes. (line 44)
+* \marginsep: Page layout parameters.
+ (line 41)
+* \marginsep <1>: Page layout parameters.
+ (line 43)
* \markboth{LEFT}{RIGHT}: \pagestyle. (line 29)
* \markright{RIGHT}: \pagestyle. (line 36)
-* \mathbf: Font styles. (line 66)
-* \mathcal: Font styles. (line 82)
-* \mathnormal: Font styles. (line 79)
+* \mathbf: Font styles. (line 112)
+* \mathcal: Font styles. (line 128)
+* \mathnormal: Font styles. (line 125)
* \mathring: Math accents. (line 40)
-* \mathrm: Font styles. (line 63)
-* \mathsf: Font styles. (line 69)
-* \mathtt: Font styles. (line 72)
-* \mathversion: Font styles. (line 84)
+* \mathrm: Font styles. (line 109)
+* \mathsf: Font styles. (line 115)
+* \mathtt: Font styles. (line 118)
+* \mathversion: Font styles. (line 130)
* \max: Math functions. (line 81)
* \mbox: \mbox. (line 6)
* \mbox, and LR mode: Modes. (line 24)
-* \mdseries: Font styles. (line 39)
+* \mdseries: Font styles. (line 36)
* \medskip: \bigskip \medskip \smallskip.
(line 15)
* \medskipamount: \bigskip \medskip \smallskip.
(line 15)
-* \mho: Math symbols. (line 307)
-* \mid: Math symbols. (line 309)
+* \medspace: Spacing in math mode.
+ (line 21)
+* \mho: Math symbols. (line 392)
+* \mid: Math symbols. (line 397)
* \min: Math functions. (line 84)
-* \models: Math symbols. (line 312)
+* \models: Math symbols. (line 407)
* \month: \day \month \year. (line 6)
-* \mp: Math symbols. (line 315)
-* \mu: Math symbols. (line 318)
+* \mp: Math symbols. (line 412)
+* \mu: Math symbols. (line 415)
* \multicolumn: \multicolumn. (line 6)
* \multiput: \multiput. (line 6)
-* \nabla: Math symbols. (line 321)
+* \nabla: Math symbols. (line 418)
* \name: \name. (line 6)
-* \natural: Math symbols. (line 324)
-* \ne: Math symbols. (line 327)
-* \nearrow: Math symbols. (line 330)
-* \neg: Math symbols. (line 333)
-* \neq: Math symbols. (line 336)
+* \natural: Math symbols. (line 421)
+* \ne: Math symbols. (line 424)
+* \nearrow: Math symbols. (line 427)
+* \neg: Math symbols. (line 430)
+* \neq: Math symbols. (line 434)
* \newcommand: \newcommand & \renewcommand.
(line 6)
* \newcounter: \newcounter. (line 6)
@@ -7183,16 +9181,16 @@ Command Index
* \newfont: \newfont. (line 6)
* \newlength: \newlength. (line 6)
* \newline: \newline. (line 6)
-* \NEWLINE: \SPACE. (line 6)
+* \NEWLINE: \(SPACE) and \@. (line 6)
* \newpage: \newpage. (line 6)
* \newsavebox: \newsavebox. (line 6)
* \newtheorem: \newtheorem. (line 6)
-* \newtie: Accents. (line 80)
+* \newtie: Accents. (line 81)
* \ng: Non-English characters.
(line 35)
* \NG: Non-English characters.
(line 35)
-* \ni: Math symbols. (line 339)
+* \ni: Math symbols. (line 437)
* \nocite: \nocite. (line 6)
* \nocorr: Font styles. (line 21)
* \nocorrlist: Font styles. (line 21)
@@ -7200,16 +9198,17 @@ Command Index
* \noindent: \noindent. (line 6)
* \nolinebreak: \linebreak & \nolinebreak.
(line 6)
-* \nonumber: eqnarray. (line 29)
+* \nonfrenchspacing: \frenchspacing. (line 6)
+* \nonumber: eqnarray. (line 41)
* \nopagebreak: \pagebreak & \nopagebreak.
(line 6)
-* \normalfont: Font styles. (line 60)
-* \normalmarginpar: Marginal notes. (line 21)
+* \normalfont: Font styles. (line 57)
+* \normalmarginpar: Marginal notes. (line 24)
* \normalsize: Font sizes. (line 11)
-* \not: Math symbols. (line 342)
-* \notin: Math symbols. (line 345)
-* \nu: Math symbols. (line 348)
-* \nwarrow: Math symbols. (line 351)
+* \not: Math symbols. (line 442)
+* \notin: Math symbols. (line 450)
+* \nu: Math symbols. (line 454)
+* \nwarrow: Math symbols. (line 457)
* \o (/o): Non-English characters.
(line 39)
* \O (/O): Non-English characters.
@@ -7217,34 +9216,46 @@ Command Index
* \obeycr: \obeycr & \restorecr.
(line 6)
* \oddsidemargin: Document class options.
- (line 57)
-* \odot: Math symbols. (line 354)
+ (line 77)
+* \oddsidemargin <1>: Page layout parameters.
+ (line 66)
+* \oddsidemargin <2>: Page layout parameters.
+ (line 68)
+* \odot: Math symbols. (line 460)
* \oe (oe): Non-English characters.
(line 43)
* \OE (OE): Non-English characters.
(line 43)
-* \oint: Math symbols. (line 357)
-* \oldstylenums: Font styles. (line 88)
-* \Omega: Math symbols. (line 360)
-* \omega: Math symbols. (line 363)
-* \ominus: Math symbols. (line 366)
+* \oint: Math symbols. (line 465)
+* \oldstylenums: Font styles. (line 134)
+* \Omega: Math symbols. (line 469)
+* \omega: Math symbols. (line 472)
+* \ominus: Math symbols. (line 475)
* \onecolumn: \onecolumn. (line 6)
* \opening: \opening. (line 6)
-* \oplus: Math symbols. (line 369)
-* \oslash: Math symbols. (line 372)
-* \otimes: Math symbols. (line 375)
+* \oplus: Math symbols. (line 478)
+* \oslash: Math symbols. (line 482)
+* \otimes: Math symbols. (line 485)
* \oval: \oval. (line 6)
* \overbrace{TEXT}: Math miscellany. (line 25)
* \overline{TEXT}: Math miscellany. (line 29)
-* \owns: Math symbols. (line 378)
+* \owns: Math symbols. (line 490)
* \P: Text symbols. (line 42)
* \pagebreak: \pagebreak & \nopagebreak.
(line 6)
* \pagenumbering: \pagenumbering. (line 6)
* \pageref: \pageref. (line 6)
* \pagestyle: \pagestyle. (line 6)
+* \paperheight: Page layout parameters.
+ (line 79)
+* \paperheight <1>: Page layout parameters.
+ (line 80)
+* \paperwidth: Page layout parameters.
+ (line 85)
+* \paperwidth <1>: Page layout parameters.
+ (line 86)
* \paragraph: Sectioning. (line 14)
-* \parallel: Math symbols. (line 381)
+* \parallel: Math symbols. (line 495)
* \parbox: \parbox. (line 6)
* \parindent: minipage. (line 17)
* \parindent <1>: \indent. (line 6)
@@ -7252,145 +9263,154 @@ Command Index
* \parskip: \parskip. (line 6)
* \parskip example: itemize. (line 92)
* \part: Sectioning. (line 8)
-* \partial: Math symbols. (line 384)
+* \partial: Math symbols. (line 498)
* \partopsep: itemize. (line 86)
-* \perp: Math symbols. (line 387)
-* \phi: Math symbols. (line 390)
-* \Pi: Math symbols. (line 393)
-* \pi: Math symbols. (line 396)
-* \pm: Math symbols. (line 399)
+* \pdfpageheight: Document class options.
+ (line 37)
+* \pdfpagewidth: Document class options.
+ (line 37)
+* \perp: Math symbols. (line 501)
+* \phi: Math symbols. (line 506)
+* \Pi: Math symbols. (line 510)
+* \pi: Math symbols. (line 513)
+* \pm: Math symbols. (line 517)
* \pmod: Math functions. (line 87)
* \poptabs: tabbing. (line 71)
* \poptabs <1>: tabbing. (line 72)
* \pounds: Text symbols. (line 46)
* \Pr: Math functions. (line 90)
-* \prec: Math symbols. (line 402)
-* \preceq: Math symbols. (line 405)
-* \prime: Math symbols. (line 408)
-* \prod: Math symbols. (line 411)
-* \propto: Math symbols. (line 414)
+* \prec: Math symbols. (line 520)
+* \preceq: Math symbols. (line 523)
+* \prime: Math symbols. (line 528)
+* \prod: Math symbols. (line 539)
+* \propto: Math symbols. (line 542)
* \protect: \protect. (line 6)
+* \providecommand: \providecommand. (line 6)
* \ps: \ps. (line 6)
-* \Psi: Math symbols. (line 417)
-* \psi: Math symbols. (line 420)
+* \Psi: Math symbols. (line 545)
+* \psi: Math symbols. (line 548)
* \pushtabs: tabbing. (line 74)
* \put: \put. (line 6)
+* \qquad: Spacing in math mode.
+ (line 38)
+* \quad: Spacing in math mode.
+ (line 32)
* \quotedblbase (,,): Text symbols. (line 50)
* \quotesinglbase (,): Text symbols. (line 51)
-* \r (ring accent): Accents. (line 74)
+* \r (ring accent): Accents. (line 75)
* \raggedbottom: \raggedbottom. (line 6)
* \raggedleft: \raggedleft. (line 6)
* \raggedright: \raggedright. (line 6)
* \raisebox: \raisebox. (line 6)
-* \rangle: Math symbols. (line 423)
-* \rbrace: Math symbols. (line 426)
-* \rbrack: Math symbols. (line 429)
-* \rceil: Math symbols. (line 432)
-* \Re: Math symbols. (line 435)
+* \rangle: Math symbols. (line 551)
+* \rbrace: Math symbols. (line 555)
+* \rbrack: Math symbols. (line 559)
+* \rceil: Math symbols. (line 563)
+* \Re: Math symbols. (line 566)
* \ref: \ref. (line 6)
* \refstepcounter: \refstepcounter. (line 6)
* \renewenvironment: \newenvironment & \renewenvironment.
(line 6)
* \restorecr: \obeycr & \restorecr.
(line 6)
-* \reversemarginpar: Marginal notes. (line 21)
-* \rfloor: Math symbols. (line 438)
-* \rhd: Math symbols. (line 441)
-* \rho: Math symbols. (line 444)
+* \restriction: Math symbols. (line 571)
+* \reversemarginpar: Marginal notes. (line 24)
+* \rfloor: Math symbols. (line 576)
+* \rhd: Math symbols. (line 580)
+* \rho: Math symbols. (line 587)
* \right: Math miscellany. (line 21)
-* \Rightarrow: Math symbols. (line 447)
-* \rightarrow: Math symbols. (line 450)
-* \rightharpoondown: Math symbols. (line 453)
-* \rightharpoonup: Math symbols. (line 456)
-* \rightleftharpoons: Math symbols. (line 459)
+* \Rightarrow: Math symbols. (line 591)
+* \rightarrow: Math symbols. (line 595)
+* \rightharpoondown: Math symbols. (line 600)
+* \rightharpoonup: Math symbols. (line 603)
+* \rightleftharpoons: Math symbols. (line 606)
* \rightmargin: itemize. (line 62)
-* \rm: Font styles. (line 115)
+* \rm: Font styles. (line 79)
* \rmfamily: Font styles. (line 30)
* \roman: \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol.
- (line 18)
+ (line 19)
* \Roman: \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol.
- (line 21)
+ (line 22)
* \rq: Text symbols. (line 54)
* \rule: \rule. (line 6)
* \S: Text symbols. (line 57)
* \savebox: \savebox. (line 6)
* \sbox: \sbox. (line 6)
-* \sc: Font styles. (line 118)
+* \sc: Font styles. (line 82)
* \scriptsize: Font sizes. (line 11)
-* \scshape: Font styles. (line 54)
-* \searrow: Math symbols. (line 462)
+* \scshape: Font styles. (line 51)
+* \searrow: Math symbols. (line 609)
* \sec: Math functions. (line 93)
* \section: Sectioning. (line 11)
* \seename: Indexes. (line 20)
* \selectfont: Low-level font commands.
- (line 65)
+ (line 127)
* \setcounter: \setcounter. (line 6)
* \setlength: \setlength. (line 6)
-* \setminus: Math symbols. (line 465)
+* \setminus: Math symbols. (line 612)
* \settodepth: \settodepth. (line 6)
* \settoheight: \settoheight. (line 6)
* \settowidth: \settowidth. (line 6)
-* \sf: Font styles. (line 121)
-* \sffamily: Font styles. (line 51)
-* \sharp: Math symbols. (line 468)
+* \sf: Font styles. (line 85)
+* \sffamily: Font styles. (line 48)
+* \sharp: Math symbols. (line 618)
* \shortstack: \shortstack. (line 6)
-* \Sigma: Math symbols. (line 471)
-* \sigma: Math symbols. (line 474)
-* \signature: \signature. (line 6)
-* \sim: Math symbols. (line 477)
-* \simeq: Math symbols. (line 480)
+* \Sigma: Math symbols. (line 621)
+* \sigma: Math symbols. (line 624)
+* \signature: \signature. (line 11)
+* \sim: Math symbols. (line 628)
+* \simeq: Math symbols. (line 631)
* \sin: Math functions. (line 96)
* \sinh: Math functions. (line 99)
-* \sl: Font styles. (line 124)
-* \slshape: Font styles. (line 48)
+* \sl: Font styles. (line 88)
+* \sloppy: \sloppy. (line 6)
+* \slshape: Font styles. (line 45)
* \small: Font sizes. (line 11)
-* \smallint: Math symbols. (line 483)
+* \smallint: Math symbols. (line 634)
* \smallskip: \bigskip \medskip \smallskip.
(line 20)
* \smallskipamount: \bigskip \medskip \smallskip.
(line 20)
-* \smile: Math symbols. (line 486)
-* \SPACE: \SPACE. (line 6)
-* \spadesuit: Math symbols. (line 489)
-* \sqcap: Math symbols. (line 492)
-* \sqcup: Math symbols. (line 495)
+* \smile: Math symbols. (line 638)
+* \spadesuit: Math symbols. (line 641)
+* \sqcap: Math symbols. (line 644)
+* \sqcup: Math symbols. (line 648)
* \sqrt[ROOT]{arg}: Math miscellany. (line 32)
-* \sqsubset: Math symbols. (line 498)
-* \sqsubseteq: Math symbols. (line 501)
-* \sqsupset: Math symbols. (line 504)
-* \sqsupseteq: Math symbols. (line 507)
+* \sqsubset: Math symbols. (line 652)
+* \sqsubseteq: Math symbols. (line 657)
+* \sqsupset: Math symbols. (line 662)
+* \sqsupseteq: Math symbols. (line 667)
* \ss (ss): Non-English characters.
(line 47)
* \SS (SS): Non-English characters.
(line 47)
* \stackrel{TEXT}{RELATION}: Math miscellany. (line 38)
-* \star: Math symbols. (line 510)
-* \startbreaks: \startbreaks. (line 6)
+* \star: Math symbols. (line 671)
* \stepcounter: \stepcounter. (line 6)
* \stop: Command line. (line 18)
-* \stopbreaks: \stopbreaks. (line 6)
* \subparagraph: Sectioning. (line 15)
* \subsection: Sectioning. (line 12)
-* \subset: Math symbols. (line 513)
-* \subseteq: Math symbols. (line 516)
+* \subset: Math symbols. (line 678)
+* \subseteq: Math symbols. (line 681)
* \subsubsection: Sectioning. (line 13)
-* \succ: Math symbols. (line 519)
-* \succeq: Math symbols. (line 522)
-* \sum: Math symbols. (line 525)
+* \succ: Math symbols. (line 684)
+* \succeq: Math symbols. (line 688)
+* \sum: Math symbols. (line 693)
* \sup: Math functions. (line 102)
-* \supset: Math symbols. (line 528)
-* \supseteq: Math symbols. (line 531)
-* \surd: Math symbols. (line 534)
-* \swarrow: Math symbols. (line 537)
+* \suppressfloats: Floats. (line 87)
+* \supset: Math symbols. (line 697)
+* \supseteq: Math symbols. (line 700)
+* \surd: Math symbols. (line 703)
+* \swarrow: Math symbols. (line 708)
* \symbol: Reserved characters. (line 25)
-* \t (tie-after accent): Accents. (line 80)
-* \TAB: \SPACE. (line 6)
+* \t (tie-after accent): Accents. (line 81)
+* \TAB: \(SPACE) and \@. (line 6)
* \tabbingsep: tabbing. (line 79)
-* \tabcolsep: tabular. (line 112)
+* \tabcolsep: tabular. (line 171)
* \tableofcontents: Tables of contents. (line 6)
* \tan: Math functions. (line 105)
* \tanh: Math functions. (line 108)
-* \tau: Math symbols. (line 540)
+* \tau: Math symbols. (line 711)
* \telephone: \telephone. (line 6)
* \TeX: Text symbols. (line 60)
* \textascenderwordmark: Text symbols. (line 98)
@@ -7400,7 +9420,7 @@ Command Index
* \textbackslash: Text symbols. (line 72)
* \textbar: Text symbols. (line 75)
* \textbardbl: Text symbols. (line 78)
-* \textbf: Font styles. (line 42)
+* \textbf: Font styles. (line 39)
* \textbigcircle: Text symbols. (line 81)
* \textbraceleft: Text symbols. (line 84)
* \textbraceright: Text symbols. (line 87)
@@ -7417,16 +9437,20 @@ Command Index
* \textendash (or '--'): Text symbols. (line 115)
* \texteuro: Text symbols. (line 118)
* \textexclamdown (or '!`'): Text symbols. (line 121)
-* \textfloatsep: figure. (line 94)
-* \textfraction: figure. (line 74)
+* \textfloatsep: Floats. (line 123)
+* \textfloatsep <1>: Floats. (line 124)
+* \textfraction: Floats. (line 102)
+* \textfraction <1>: Floats. (line 103)
* \textgreater: Text symbols. (line 124)
* \textheight: Page layout parameters.
- (line 29)
+ (line 91)
+* \textheight <1>: Page layout parameters.
+ (line 92)
* \textit: Font styles. (line 33)
* \textleftarrow: Text symbols. (line 130)
* \textless: Text symbols. (line 127)
-* \textmd: Font styles. (line 39)
-* \textnormal: Font styles. (line 60)
+* \textmd: Font styles. (line 36)
+* \textnormal: Font styles. (line 57)
* \textordfeminine: Text symbols. (line 133)
* \textordmasculine: Text symbols. (line 134)
* \textparagraph: Text symbols. (line 43)
@@ -7441,118 +9465,127 @@ Command Index
* \textregistered: Text symbols. (line 159)
* \textrightarrow: Text symbols. (line 162)
* \textrm: Font styles. (line 30)
-* \textsc: Font styles. (line 54)
-* \textsf: Font styles. (line 51)
-* \textsl: Font styles. (line 48)
+* \textsc: Font styles. (line 51)
+* \textsf: Font styles. (line 48)
+* \textsl: Font styles. (line 45)
* \textsterling: Text symbols. (line 47)
* \textthreequartersemdash: Text symbols. (line 165)
* \texttrademark: Text symbols. (line 168)
-* \texttt: Font styles. (line 57)
+* \texttt: Font styles. (line 54)
* \texttwelveudash: Text symbols. (line 171)
* \textunderscore: Text symbols. (line 174)
-* \textup: Font styles. (line 45)
+* \textup: Font styles. (line 42)
* \textvisiblespace: Text symbols. (line 177)
* \textwidth: Page layout parameters.
- (line 36)
+ (line 99)
+* \textwidth <1>: Page layout parameters.
+ (line 100)
* \th (th): Non-English characters.
(line 51)
* \TH (TH): Non-English characters.
(line 51)
* \thanks{TEXT}: \maketitle. (line 21)
-* \theta: Math symbols. (line 543)
+* \theta: Math symbols. (line 714)
* \thicklines: \thicklines. (line 6)
+* \thickspace: Spacing in math mode.
+ (line 16)
* \thinlines: \thinlines. (line 6)
-* \thinspace: \thinspace. (line 6)
+* \thinspace: Spacing in math mode.
+ (line 25)
+* \thinspace <1>: \thinspace. (line 6)
* \thispagestyle: \thispagestyle. (line 6)
* \tilde: Math accents. (line 43)
-* \times: Math symbols. (line 546)
+* \times: Math symbols. (line 718)
* \tiny: Font sizes. (line 11)
* \title{TEXT}: \maketitle. (line 25)
-* \to: Math symbols. (line 549)
+* \to: Math symbols. (line 722)
* \today: \today. (line 6)
-* \top: Math symbols. (line 552)
-* \topfraction: figure. (line 79)
+* \top: Math symbols. (line 726)
+* \topfraction: Floats. (line 107)
+* \topfraction <1>: Floats. (line 108)
* \topmargin: Page layout parameters.
- (line 60)
+ (line 123)
* \topsep: itemize. (line 80)
* \topskip: Page layout parameters.
- (line 67)
+ (line 130)
+* \topskip <1>: Page layout parameters.
+ (line 131)
* \totalheight: Predefined lengths. (line 12)
-* \triangle: Math symbols. (line 555)
-* \triangleleft: Math symbols. (line 558)
-* \triangleright: Math symbols. (line 561)
-* \tt: Font styles. (line 127)
-* \ttfamily: Font styles. (line 57)
+* \triangle: Math symbols. (line 730)
+* \triangleleft: Math symbols. (line 733)
+* \triangleright: Math symbols. (line 739)
+* \tt: Font styles. (line 91)
+* \ttfamily: Font styles. (line 54)
* \twocolumn: \twocolumn. (line 6)
* \typein: \typein. (line 6)
* \typeout: \typeout. (line 6)
-* \u (breve accent): Accents. (line 85)
+* \u (breve accent): Accents. (line 86)
* \unboldmath: Math formulas. (line 29)
-* \underbar: Accents. (line 88)
+* \underbar: Accents. (line 89)
* \underbrace{math}: Math miscellany. (line 42)
* \underline{text}: Math miscellany. (line 45)
* \unitlength: picture. (line 10)
-* \unlhd: Math symbols. (line 564)
-* \unrhd: Math symbols. (line 567)
-* \Uparrow: Math symbols. (line 570)
-* \uparrow: Math symbols. (line 573)
-* \Updownarrow: Math symbols. (line 576)
-* \updownarrow: Math symbols. (line 579)
-* \uplus: Math symbols. (line 582)
-* \upshape: Font styles. (line 45)
-* \Upsilon: Math symbols. (line 585)
-* \upsilon: Math symbols. (line 588)
+* \unlhd: Math symbols. (line 745)
+* \unrhd: Math symbols. (line 752)
+* \Uparrow: Math symbols. (line 759)
+* \uparrow: Math symbols. (line 764)
+* \Updownarrow: Math symbols. (line 768)
+* \updownarrow: Math symbols. (line 773)
+* \upharpoonright: Math symbols. (line 778)
+* \uplus: Math symbols. (line 783)
+* \upshape: Font styles. (line 42)
+* \Upsilon: Math symbols. (line 789)
+* \upsilon: Math symbols. (line 792)
* \usebox: \usebox. (line 6)
* \usecounter: \usecounter. (line 6)
* \usefont: Low-level font commands.
- (line 69)
+ (line 135)
* \usepackage: Document class options.
- (line 75)
-* \v (breve accent): Accents. (line 95)
+ (line 95)
+* \v (breve accent): Accents. (line 97)
* \value: \value. (line 6)
-* \varepsilon: Math symbols. (line 591)
-* \varphi: Math symbols. (line 594)
-* \varpi: Math symbols. (line 597)
-* \varrho: Math symbols. (line 600)
-* \varsigma: Math symbols. (line 603)
-* \vartheta: Math symbols. (line 606)
-* \vdash: Math symbols. (line 609)
+* \varepsilon: Math symbols. (line 795)
+* \varphi: Math symbols. (line 800)
+* \varpi: Math symbols. (line 804)
+* \varrho: Math symbols. (line 808)
+* \varsigma: Math symbols. (line 812)
+* \vartheta: Math symbols. (line 816)
+* \vdash: Math symbols. (line 820)
* \vdots: Math miscellany. (line 50)
* \vdots <1>: Math miscellany. (line 51)
* \vec: Math accents. (line 46)
* \vector: \vector. (line 6)
-* \vee: Math symbols. (line 612)
+* \vee: Math symbols. (line 824)
* \verb: \verb. (line 6)
-* \Vert: Math symbols. (line 615)
-* \vert: Math symbols. (line 618)
+* \Vert: Math symbols. (line 829)
+* \vert: Math symbols. (line 845)
* \vfill: \vfill. (line 6)
* \vline: \vline. (line 6)
* \vspace: \vspace. (line 6)
-* \wedge: Math symbols. (line 621)
+* \wedge: Math symbols. (line 863)
* \widehat: Math accents. (line 49)
-* \widehat <1>: Math accents. (line 52)
+* \widetilde: Math accents. (line 52)
* \width: Predefined lengths. (line 6)
-* \wp: Math symbols. (line 624)
-* \wr: Math symbols. (line 627)
-* \Xi: Math symbols. (line 630)
-* \xi: Math symbols. (line 633)
+* \wp: Math symbols. (line 867)
+* \wr: Math symbols. (line 870)
+* \Xi: Math symbols. (line 873)
+* \xi: Math symbols. (line 876)
* \year: \day \month \year. (line 6)
-* \zeta: Math symbols. (line 636)
+* \zeta: Math symbols. (line 879)
* \[: Math formulas. (line 16)
-* \\ (for 'array'): array. (line 27)
-* \\ (for 'center'): center. (line 13)
-* \\ (for 'eqnarray'): eqnarray. (line 21)
+* \\ (for 'center'): center. (line 18)
+* \\ (for 'eqnarray'): eqnarray. (line 29)
* \\ (for 'flushright'): flushright. (line 12)
* \\ (for '\shortstack' objects): \shortstack. (line 20)
* \\ (tabbing): tabbing. (line 24)
* \\ for 'flushleft': flushleft. (line 12)
-* \\ for letters: Letters. (line 32)
-* \\ for 'tabular': tabular. (line 23)
+* \\ for letters: Letters. (line 50)
+* \\ for 'tabular': tabular. (line 34)
* \\ for 'verse': verse. (line 17)
* \\ for '\author': \maketitle. (line 12)
* \\ for '\title': \maketitle. (line 26)
* \\ force line break: \\. (line 6)
-* \\* (for 'eqnarray'): eqnarray. (line 26)
+* \\* (for 'eqnarray'): eqnarray. (line 37)
* \]: Math formulas. (line 16)
* \^: Reserved characters. (line 21)
* \^ (circumflex accent): Accents. (line 33)
@@ -7560,7 +9593,7 @@ Command Index
* \` (grave accent): Accents. (line 37)
* \` (tabbing): tabbing. (line 51)
* \{: Reserved characters. (line 11)
-* \|: Math symbols. (line 11)
+* \|: Math symbols. (line 16)
* \}: Reserved characters. (line 11)
* \~: Reserved characters. (line 21)
* \~ (tilde accent): Accents. (line 43)
@@ -7580,42 +9613,52 @@ Command Index
* b5paper option: Document class options.
(line 19)
* book class: Document classes. (line 11)
-* bottomnumber: figure. (line 100)
+* bottomnumber: Floats. (line 130)
+* bottomnumber <1>: Floats. (line 131)
+* bp: Units of length. (line 20)
+* cc: Units of length. (line 33)
* center environment: center. (line 6)
* clock option to 'slides' class: Document class options.
- (line 72)
-* dbltopnumber: figure. (line 104)
+ (line 92)
+* cm: Units of length. (line 24)
+* dbltopnumber: Floats. (line 134)
+* dbltopnumber <1>: Floats. (line 135)
+* dd: Units of length. (line 30)
* description environment: description. (line 6)
* displaymath environment: displaymath. (line 6)
* displaymath environment <1>: Math formulas. (line 6)
* document environment: document. (line 6)
* draft option: Document class options.
- (line 24)
+ (line 44)
* dvipdfmx command: Output files. (line 10)
* dvips command: Output files. (line 10)
* dvitype command: Output files. (line 10)
+* em: Units of length. (line 38)
* enumerate environment: enumerate. (line 6)
* eqnarray environment: eqnarray. (line 6)
* equation environment: equation. (line 6)
* equation environment <1>: Math formulas. (line 6)
* etex command: TeX engines. (line 12)
+* ex: Units of length. (line 38)
* executivepaper option: Document class options.
(line 19)
* figure: figure. (line 6)
* filecontents: filecontents. (line 6)
* final option: Document class options.
- (line 24)
+ (line 44)
* first-latex-doc document: About this document. (line 33)
* fleqn option: Document class options.
- (line 24)
+ (line 44)
* flushleft environment: flushleft. (line 6)
* flushright environment: flushright. (line 6)
* <http://home.gna.org/latexrefman> home page: About this document.
(line 6)
+* in: Units of length. (line 17)
+* inch: Units of length. (line 17)
* indexspace: Indexes. (line 32)
* itemize environment: itemize. (line 6)
* landscape option: Document class options.
- (line 24)
+ (line 44)
* latex command: Output files. (line 10)
* latex-doc-ptr document: About this document. (line 30)
* <latexrefman-discuss@gna.org> email address: About this document.
@@ -7623,9 +9666,9 @@ Command Index
* legalpaper option: Document class options.
(line 19)
* leqno option: Document class options.
- (line 24)
-* letter: letter. (line 6)
+ (line 44)
* letter class: Document classes. (line 11)
+* letter environment: letter. (line 6)
* letterpaper option: Document class options.
(line 19)
* list: list. (line 6)
@@ -7636,260 +9679,278 @@ Command Index
* math environment: math. (line 6)
* math environment <1>: Math formulas. (line 6)
* minipage environment: minipage. (line 6)
+* mm: Units of length. (line 27)
+* mu: Units of length. (line 49)
* notitlepage option: Document class options.
- (line 24)
+ (line 44)
* onecolumn option: Document class options.
- (line 51)
+ (line 71)
* oneside option: Document class options.
- (line 51)
+ (line 71)
* openany option: Document class options.
- (line 51)
+ (line 71)
* openbib option: Document class options.
- (line 24)
+ (line 44)
* openright option: Document class options.
- (line 51)
+ (line 71)
+* pc: Units of length. (line 14)
* pdflatex command: Output files. (line 20)
* picture: picture. (line 6)
* printindex: Indexes. (line 28)
-* quotation: quotation. (line 6)
-* quote: quote. (line 6)
+* pt: Units of length. (line 10)
+* quotation: quotation and quote. (line 6)
+* quote: quotation and quote. (line 6)
* report class: Document classes. (line 11)
* secnumdepth counter: Sectioning. (line 47)
* slides class: Document classes. (line 11)
+* sp: Units of length. (line 36)
* tabbing environment: tabbing. (line 6)
* table: table. (line 6)
* tabular environment: tabular. (line 6)
* textcomp package: Text symbols. (line 6)
-* thebibliography: thebibliography. (line 6)
+* thebibliography environment: thebibliography. (line 6)
* theorem environment: theorem. (line 6)
* titlepage environment: titlepage. (line 6)
* titlepage option: Document class options.
- (line 24)
-* topnumber: figure. (line 108)
-* totalnumber: figure. (line 112)
+ (line 44)
+* topmargin: Page layout parameters.
+ (line 124)
+* topnumber: Floats. (line 138)
+* topnumber <1>: Floats. (line 139)
+* totalnumber: Floats. (line 142)
+* totalnumber <1>: Floats. (line 143)
* twocolumn option: Document class options.
- (line 51)
+ (line 71)
* twoside option: Document class options.
- (line 51)
+ (line 71)
* usrguide official documentation: About this document. (line 36)
* verbatim environment: verbatim. (line 6)
* verse environment: verse. (line 6)
* xdvi command: Output files. (line 10)
+* xdvipdfmx: TeX engines. (line 38)
* xelatex command: TeX engines. (line 38)

Tag Table:
-Node: Top1689
-Node: About this document3435
-Node: Overview5219
-Node: Starting and ending6707
-Ref: Starting & ending6842
-Node: Output files7808
-Node: TeX engines10066
-Node: LaTeX command syntax12280
-Node: Document classes13370
-Node: Document class options14498
-Node: Fonts17174
-Ref: Typefaces17277
-Node: Font styles17605
-Node: Font sizes21503
-Node: Low-level font commands22734
-Node: Layout25184
-Node: \onecolumn25653
-Node: \twocolumn25866
-Node: \flushbottom27370
-Node: \raggedbottom27732
-Node: Page layout parameters28018
-Node: Sectioning31050
-Node: Cross references32595
-Node: \label33026
-Node: \pageref33898
-Node: \ref34197
-Node: Environments34587
-Node: abstract36100
-Node: array36341
-Node: center37685
-Node: \centering38162
-Node: description39002
-Node: displaymath39816
-Node: document40384
-Node: enumerate40643
-Node: eqnarray41932
-Node: equation43318
-Node: figure43691
-Node: filecontents47638
-Node: flushleft49331
-Node: \raggedright49822
-Node: flushright50381
-Node: \raggedleft50869
-Node: itemize51426
-Node: letter55057
-Node: list55295
-Node: math56232
-Node: minipage56534
-Node: picture57726
-Node: \circle61757
-Node: \makebox (picture)62099
-Node: \framebox (picture)62804
-Node: \dashbox63294
-Node: \frame63817
-Node: \line64143
-Node: \linethickness64601
-Node: \thicklines65022
-Node: \thinlines65332
-Node: \multiput65634
-Node: \oval66000
-Node: \put66614
-Node: \shortstack66905
-Node: \vector67379
-Node: quotation67693
-Node: quote68149
-Node: tabbing68581
-Node: table71748
-Node: tabular72638
-Node: \multicolumn76727
-Node: \cline77524
-Node: \hline77844
-Node: \vline78158
-Node: thebibliography78471
-Node: \bibitem79613
-Node: \cite80344
-Node: \nocite80843
-Node: Using BibTeX81127
-Node: theorem82610
-Node: titlepage82996
-Node: verbatim83598
-Node: \verb84225
-Node: verse84775
-Node: Line breaking85269
-Node: \\86325
-Node: \obeycr & \restorecr86793
-Node: \newline87195
-Node: \- (hyphenation)87483
-Node: \fussy88090
-Node: \sloppy88481
-Node: \hyphenation88808
-Node: \linebreak & \nolinebreak89433
-Node: Page breaking90085
-Node: \cleardoublepage90693
-Node: \clearpage91100
-Node: \newpage91376
-Node: \enlargethispage91611
-Node: \pagebreak & \nopagebreak92138
-Node: Footnotes92832
-Node: \footnote93450
-Node: \footnotemark93968
-Node: \footnotetext94534
-Node: Symbolic footnotes95019
-Node: Footnote parameters95576
-Node: Definitions96313
-Node: \newcommand & \renewcommand97030
-Node: \newcounter98513
-Node: \newlength99018
-Node: \newsavebox99529
-Node: \newenvironment & \renewenvironment99836
-Node: \newtheorem101213
-Node: \newfont102179
-Node: \protect102659
-Node: Counters103522
-Node: \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol104766
-Node: \usecounter105880
-Node: \value106242
-Node: \setcounter106627
-Node: \addtocounter106916
-Node: \refstepcounter107212
-Node: \stepcounter107557
-Node: \day \month \year107808
-Node: Lengths108353
-Node: \setlength108922
-Node: \addtolength109264
-Node: \settodepth109559
-Node: \settoheight109834
-Node: \settowidth110113
-Node: Predefined lengths110377
-Node: Making paragraphs110892
-Node: \indent111464
-Node: \noindent111936
-Node: \parskip112222
-Node: Marginal notes112480
-Node: Math formulas114110
-Node: Subscripts & superscripts115892
-Node: Math symbols116359
-Node: Math functions123172
-Node: Math accents124114
-Node: Spacing in math mode125084
-Node: Math miscellany125715
-Node: Modes127214
-Node: Page styles128996
-Node: \maketitle129490
-Node: \pagenumbering130560
-Node: \pagestyle131056
-Node: \thispagestyle132197
-Node: Spaces132503
-Node: \hspace133555
-Node: \hfill134114
-Node: \SPACE134511
-Node: \@135021
-Ref: \AT135192
-Node: \thinspace135552
-Node: \/135843
-Node: \hrulefill137016
-Node: \dotfill137278
-Node: \addvspace137502
-Node: \bigskip \medskip \smallskip137997
-Node: \vfill138891
-Node: \vspace139196
-Node: Boxes139626
-Node: \mbox140351
-Node: \fbox and \framebox140638
-Node: lrbox141441
-Node: \makebox141758
-Node: \parbox142471
-Node: \raisebox143800
-Node: \savebox144397
-Node: \sbox144812
-Node: \usebox145261
-Node: Special insertions145522
-Node: Reserved characters146168
-Node: Text symbols147571
-Node: Accents150906
-Node: Non-English characters153379
-Node: \rule154146
-Node: \today154573
-Node: Splitting the input155018
-Node: \include155780
-Node: \includeonly156367
-Node: \input156859
-Node: Front/back matter157350
-Node: Tables of contents157555
-Node: \addcontentsline158616
-Node: \addtocontents159509
-Node: Glossaries160038
-Node: Indexes160557
-Node: Letters162184
-Node: \address164125
-Node: \cc164730
-Node: \closing164966
-Node: \encl165199
-Node: \location165391
-Node: \makelabels165653
-Node: \name165942
-Node: \opening166164
-Node: \ps166489
-Node: \signature166672
-Node: \startbreaks166955
-Node: \stopbreaks167177
-Node: \telephone167392
-Node: Terminal input/output167624
-Node: \typein167889
-Node: \typeout168470
-Node: Command line169093
-Node: Document templates170045
-Node: beamer template170452
-Node: book template171103
-Node: tugboat template171471
-Node: Concept Index173573
-Node: Command Index215567
+Node: Top1686
+Node: About this document3436
+Node: Overview5220
+Node: Starting and ending6720
+Ref: Starting & ending6855
+Node: Output files7841
+Node: TeX engines10099
+Node: LaTeX command syntax12537
+Node: Environment14289
+Node: Declaration15267
+Node: Document classes15559
+Node: Document class options16763
+Node: Fonts20023
+Ref: Typefaces20126
+Node: Font styles20454
+Node: Font sizes24883
+Node: Low-level font commands26114
+Node: Layout31347
+Node: \onecolumn31845
+Node: \twocolumn32207
+Node: \flushbottom36620
+Node: \raggedbottom37565
+Node: Page layout parameters38115
+Node: Floats43813
+Node: Sectioning50258
+Node: Cross references51803
+Node: \label52234
+Node: \pageref53687
+Node: \ref53986
+Node: Environments54376
+Node: abstract56064
+Node: array56306
+Node: center58359
+Node: \centering59635
+Node: description61005
+Node: displaymath62620
+Node: document64476
+Node: \AtBeginDocument64906
+Node: \AtEndDocument65479
+Node: enumerate66076
+Node: eqnarray68350
+Node: equation70404
+Node: figure70922
+Node: filecontents72734
+Node: flushleft74487
+Node: \raggedright74980
+Node: flushright75539
+Node: \raggedleft76037
+Node: itemize76594
+Node: letter80225
+Node: list80463
+Node: \item81449
+Node: math82507
+Node: minipage82808
+Node: picture84000
+Node: \circle88025
+Node: \makebox (picture)88368
+Node: \framebox (picture)89074
+Node: \dashbox89564
+Node: \frame90087
+Node: \line90413
+Node: \linethickness90871
+Node: \thicklines91292
+Node: \thinlines91602
+Node: \multiput91904
+Node: \oval92271
+Node: \put92992
+Node: \shortstack93283
+Node: \vector93757
+Node: quotation and quote94071
+Node: tabbing95277
+Node: table98458
+Node: tabular99885
+Node: \multicolumn107109
+Node: \vline110991
+Node: \cline112312
+Node: \hline112996
+Node: thebibliography113679
+Node: \bibitem114821
+Node: \cite115553
+Node: \nocite116053
+Node: Using BibTeX116327
+Node: theorem117810
+Node: titlepage118196
+Node: verbatim118798
+Node: \verb119425
+Node: verse119975
+Node: Line breaking120469
+Node: \\121473
+Node: \obeycr & \restorecr122510
+Node: \newline122912
+Node: \- (hyphenation)123745
+Node: \fussy124352
+Node: \sloppy124743
+Node: \hyphenation125070
+Node: \linebreak & \nolinebreak125695
+Node: Page breaking126347
+Node: \cleardoublepage126955
+Node: \clearpage127384
+Node: \newpage127681
+Node: \enlargethispage127912
+Node: \pagebreak & \nopagebreak128439
+Node: Footnotes129133
+Node: \footnote130387
+Node: \footnotemark132183
+Node: \footnotetext133427
+Node: Footnotes in a table133917
+Node: Footnotes in section headings135735
+Node: Footnotes of footnotes136554
+Node: Multiple reference to footnotes137322
+Node: Footnote parameters138183
+Node: Definitions138933
+Node: \newcommand & \renewcommand139746
+Node: \providecommand143194
+Node: \newcounter143855
+Node: \newlength144791
+Node: \newsavebox145438
+Node: \newenvironment & \renewenvironment146049
+Node: \newtheorem150099
+Node: \newfont153495
+Node: \protect155060
+Node: Counters157174
+Node: \alph \Alph \arabic \roman \Roman \fnsymbol158786
+Node: \usecounter159961
+Node: \value160793
+Node: \setcounter161736
+Node: \addtocounter162095
+Node: \refstepcounter162400
+Node: \stepcounter163058
+Node: \day \month \year163400
+Node: Lengths163945
+Node: Units of length165735
+Node: \setlength167229
+Node: \addtolength167595
+Node: \settodepth167894
+Node: \settoheight168169
+Node: \settowidth168448
+Node: Predefined lengths168712
+Node: Making paragraphs169227
+Node: \indent169799
+Node: \noindent170261
+Node: \parskip170769
+Node: Marginal notes171027
+Node: Math formulas172839
+Node: Subscripts & superscripts174623
+Node: Math symbols175970
+Node: Math functions200824
+Node: Math accents201766
+Node: Spacing in math mode202738
+Node: Math miscellany204184
+Node: Modes205683
+Node: Page styles207465
+Node: \maketitle207959
+Node: \pagenumbering209029
+Node: \pagestyle209525
+Node: \thispagestyle210666
+Node: Spaces210972
+Node: \hspace211899
+Node: \hfill212853
+Node: \(SPACE) and \@213248
+Ref: \AT213395
+Node: \(SPACE) after CS214940
+Node: \frenchspacing216449
+Node: \thinspace217052
+Node: \/217355
+Node: \hrulefill \dotfill218537
+Node: \addvspace219530
+Node: \bigskip \medskip \smallskip220575
+Node: \vfill221469
+Node: \vspace222338
+Node: Boxes223147
+Node: \mbox223872
+Node: \fbox and \framebox224159
+Node: lrbox224962
+Node: \makebox225279
+Node: \parbox225999
+Node: \raisebox227328
+Node: \savebox227925
+Node: \sbox228340
+Node: \usebox228789
+Node: Special insertions229050
+Node: Reserved characters229696
+Node: Text symbols231099
+Node: Accents234433
+Node: Non-English characters236973
+Node: \rule237740
+Node: \today238167
+Node: Splitting the input238612
+Node: \include239374
+Node: \includeonly239961
+Node: \input240453
+Node: Front/back matter240948
+Node: Tables of contents241153
+Node: \addcontentsline242214
+Node: \addtocontents243111
+Node: Glossaries243644
+Node: Indexes244163
+Node: Letters245790
+Node: \address249461
+Node: \cc250331
+Node: \closing250740
+Node: \encl251051
+Node: \location251464
+Node: \makelabels251733
+Node: \name252734
+Node: \opening252964
+Node: \ps253303
+Node: \signature253593
+Node: \telephone254684
+Node: Terminal input/output255049
+Node: \typein255314
+Node: \typeout255895
+Node: Command line256518
+Node: Document templates257470
+Node: beamer template257877
+Node: book template258528
+Node: tugboat template258896
+Node: Concept Index260998
+Node: Command Index307506

End Tag Table